WO2003107091A1 - Method of inspecting used photographic cassette, method of reusing the cassette, and method of producing photographic film - Google Patents

Method of inspecting used photographic cassette, method of reusing the cassette, and method of producing photographic film Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2003107091A1
WO2003107091A1 PCT/JP2003/007144 JP0307144W WO03107091A1 WO 2003107091 A1 WO2003107091 A1 WO 2003107091A1 JP 0307144 W JP0307144 W JP 0307144W WO 03107091 A1 WO03107091 A1 WO 03107091A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
film
photographic
spool
patrone
inspection
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2003/007144
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
合田 芳彦
石井 英雄
柴崎 理
Original Assignee
コニカ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2002173301A external-priority patent/JP2004020750A/en
Priority claimed from JP2002191532A external-priority patent/JP2004037589A/en
Application filed by コニカ株式会社 filed Critical コニカ株式会社
Publication of WO2003107091A1 publication Critical patent/WO2003107091A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/26Holders for containing light sensitive material and adapted to be inserted within the camera
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C3/00Packages of films for inserting into cameras, e.g. roll-films, film-packs; Wrapping materials for light-sensitive plates, films or papers, e.g. materials characterised by the use of special dyes, printing inks, adhesives

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method for inspecting a used photo cartridge and an inspection system thereof, and more particularly, to a method and an inspection system for non-destructively inspecting a used photo cartridge without disassembling.
  • the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a photographic film, and more particularly, to a photographic film in which a photographic film is locked and wound around a photographic cartridge having a built-in spool and both sides shielded by a cap. And a method for producing the same.
  • the present invention relates to a method for reusing a photo patrol port and a system for reusing a photo patrone. More specifically, the present invention relates to a photo patrol port without disassembling the photo patrol port at all. The present invention relates to a method for reusing a photographic patrone and a system for reusing a photographic patrone that can remove a tail end of a film locked in the photographic cartridge and lock a new tail end of the film.
  • landscape technology
  • the applicant of the present invention has applied a method and a system in which the photographic patrone can be reused without disassembling it with maximum consideration for environmental suitability.
  • a part of the tail end of a photographic film that has been cut near a slit opening and locked to a spool in a used photographic door (hereinafter referred to as a tail end film).
  • this tail-end film as a guide, insert a thin plate jig from the slit opening, remove the tail-end film from the spool with this jig, and then insert the jig into this jig.
  • the tool as a guide, a new unexposed film is inserted from the slit opening, locked on the spool, and then rolled up with the unexposed film.
  • the photo cartridge will use the used product as it is.
  • the unexposed film In order to maintain the quality of the unexposed film (with the unexposed film entangled in the photographic cartridge), the unexposed film must be wrapped in the photographic cartridge before reuse. The patrone itself is scratched, deformed, and leaked light It is necessary to inspect whether there is any defect such as the power, that is, whether the photo door is reusable. In this case, in order to re-use the photographic patrone without disassembling it in consideration of environmental suitability, this inspection also requires the entire photographic patrone from outside to inside without disassembling the photographic patrone. Inspection by destruction is required.
  • the first object of the present invention is to realize recycling production with minimum waste by maximizing environmental suitability and inspecting photographic patrone without decomposing it without decomposing it.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide an inspection method and an inspection system for a photographic patrone that can be used.
  • the production of photographic film in which a photographic film of 35 mm or the like is wound and housed in a patrone, is generally performed by stamping and bending steel plates, rolling a boat with telemps, and rolling the steel plate.
  • a patrone with a cap fitted on only one side is formed, and a film scroll (a film wrapped around a spool) is accommodated in this pat opening, and then the other side of the pat opening is placed. This was done by fitting a cap.
  • the patrone in which the cap is fitted on only one side tends to expand due to the elasticity of the steel plate on the other side where the cap is not fitted, so the shape variation is large due to the characteristic variations such as the hardness of the steel plate.
  • the patrone in which the cap is fitted on only one side tends to expand due to the elasticity of the steel plate on the other side where the cap is not fitted, so the shape variation is large due to the characteristic variations such as the hardness of the steel plate.
  • there were many problems such as poor positioning of the mouth of the pat and the wrong check.
  • Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 49-107732 discloses a spool built in and caps on both sides.
  • a leaf spring with a high elastic coefficient that has been processed so that the tip is curved in advance from the slit slot of the patrone in the fitted state
  • the tip of the leaf spring that has passed through the slit is bent into a curved shape by its elasticity.
  • the film is inserted into the slit spring along the inside of the plate spring to lock the film on the spool.
  • the leaf spring is removed from the slit opening and the film is wound.
  • the method of taking is disclosed.
  • the leaf spring is formed into a curved shape at the tip by a member having a high elastic modulus, so the shape is not stable, and the tip may not reach the target position, that is, the film locking portion of the spool. There was also a problem that the reliability of the locking was reduced.
  • a second object of the present invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems, to provide a built-in spool, and to apply a film from the outside of the cartridge to a stable photographic cartridge with both sides shielded by a cap. It is an object of the present invention to provide a method of manufacturing a photographic film that can be locked and wound and that can be locked without damaging a patrone's slit opening or telemp.
  • patrone May be called patrone.
  • a mating type patrone that can easily remove the cap, cut the long film with scissors, etc., lock the film with adhesive tape, wrap the film around the spool, and then open the Only a small number of users have used a refill method that puts the cap into the bag and fits the cap by hand.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-337374 proposes a method of disassembling a pat mouth, taking out a spool therefrom, and reusing only this spool. Even the body of the pachinko mouth other than the spool becomes garbage.
  • the film tail end and the spool are generally locked by engaging an engagement hole formed on the film tail end side with a locking claw formed in a slit of the spool. I have. For this reason, in order to remove the old film from the spool and attach the unexposed new film to the spool, the two can be easily disengaged or engaged. It is desired to stop.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-136642 discloses that after joining the leading end of a film to a strip (leader) having one end connected to a spool and the other end exposed from a patrone slit opening, A method of winding a film on a spool is disclosed.
  • leader leading end of a film
  • a strip having one end connected to a spool and the other end exposed from a patrone slit opening
  • a flexible guide strip (leader) is attached to the spool, and one of the spools is attached to the patrol mouth with the one protruding outside the patrone, and is placed along the leader.
  • a method is disclosed in which a film is inserted and locked on a spool, and wound around a film together with a leader.
  • the leader easily jams at the slit opening of the cartridge when feeding the film.
  • the leader is put through the processor with the slit coming out of the slit, when the tail end of the film is cut with force, the film and the leader will be overlapped and cut. Wear may also occur.
  • Japanese Patent No. 2967790 describes a patrone composed of two resin case parts, in which the film guide means is integrally formed with the spool so that the boundary with the spool becomes thin. , With one end of the film guide protruding from the film entrance A method is disclosed in which after the film is locked on the spool along the film guide means, the film guide means is separated and the film is wound.
  • the film guide means is separated (teared)
  • powder and dust are easily generated, and there is a problem that the film adheres to the film and causes harm.
  • Patent No. 3 036 715 discloses that in an APS cartridge, a locking hole at the leading end of a film is captured by an arc-shaped jig made of a thin metal plate, and force is applied through a cartridge slit slot.
  • a third object of the present invention is to provide a photo pat mouth which can greatly reduce trash by reusing a used pat mouth which has been conventionally garbage without disassembling it. And a reuse system.
  • a method for reusing a photographic port for a photograph comprising:
  • a photographic patrone reuse system for reusing a used patrick's mouth without disassembling a film coming out of a squirt in the patrone
  • Type determining means for determining the type of the locking structure between the film and the spool
  • a jig corresponding to the type of the locking structure determined by the type determining means is inserted from a slit slot of the patrol opening, and a film tail locked on the spool is removed.
  • Locking means for locking a new film tail end corresponding to the locking structure to the spool using a jig corresponding to the type of the locking structure determined by the type determining means; locking to the spool Winding means for winding the film thus obtained,
  • a reusing system for a photo pat mouth 3.Inspection method for photographic patricks, which has a slit for penetrating photographic film, has a built-in spool, and has both sides shielded by caps. And
  • a method for inspecting a used photographic patrone comprising an internal inspection step of inspecting the inside of the photographic patrone.
  • a photographic patrone inspection system that has a slit opening through which photographic film passes, has a built-in spool, and inspects a used photographic patrone without disassembling both sides of which are shielded by caps.
  • An inspection system for a used photographic cartridge comprising an internal inspection means for inspecting the inside of the photographic cartridge.
  • a method of manufacturing a photographic film by loading a photographic film into a photographic patrone having a slit opening for loading a photographic film, incorporating a spool, and having both sides shielded by caps,
  • a guide member which is formed by connecting a flat rear guide portion to a flat front guide portion at a predetermined angle and inclined at a predetermined angle, is provided in the slit opening. Inserting in a straight line from the front end guide section in a state parallel to the extending direction and in a state where the rear end guide section is positioned on the patrone main body side with respect to the slit slot;
  • the guide member inserted into the slit roller is rotated toward the inclined side so that the distal end of the tip guide portion is directed to the spool, and a part of the rear end guide portion of the guide member is inserted into the slit roller. Further inserting the distal end guide portion so that the distal end of the distal end guide portion approaches the spool;
  • the photographic film is removed from the slittro while contacting the inclined surface side of the guide member. Inserting, and locking the leading end of the film to the spool;
  • a method for producing a photographic film comprising:
  • the conventional problem is solved and a spool is built in and it can lock
  • Fig. 1 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the internal configuration of the patrone
  • Fig. 1 (b) is a side view of Fig. 1 (a) viewed from the direction I;
  • Fig. 2 is a side view of the patrone seen from the I-I direction in Fig. 1 (b);
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a used pato mouth
  • FIG. 4 is a process block diagram showing the flow of the method for inspecting a used photo patrone according to the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic configuration of a used photographic cartridge inspection system according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing an example of a rotation direction positioning means (bucket); FIG. Figure showing an example;
  • FIG. 8 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a film unwinding process
  • Fig. 9 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of the light leakage inspection process
  • FIG. 10 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a foreign matter inspection process
  • Fig. 11 is a partial sectional view showing the structure of the tray
  • FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing an example of the holding means
  • FIG. 13 (a) is a perspective view showing an external configuration of a photographic patrone
  • FIG. 13 (b) is a sectional view thereof.
  • Fig. 14 (a) is a perspective view of a spool housed in the patrone
  • Fig. 14 (b) is a central sectional view of the spool
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a production apparatus suitable for carrying out the method for producing a photographic film according to the first aspect of the present invention
  • FIG. 16 is used in the method for producing a photographic film according to the first aspect of the present invention.
  • FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (g) are diagrams for explaining the steps of the method for manufacturing a photographic film according to the first aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18 (a) is a perspective view showing a guide member used in the method of manufacturing a photographic film according to the second aspect, and FIG. 18 (b) is a side view thereof;
  • FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing a guide member used in the method of manufacturing a photographic film according to the third aspect and a configuration around the guide member;
  • Figures 20 (a) to 20 (e) are diagrams illustrating the steps of a method for manufacturing a photographic film according to the third aspect
  • FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing another embodiment of the guide member according to the third aspect
  • FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing the external configuration of a 135-type photographic patrone
  • FIG. 23 (a) is a patrone Perspective view of the spool housed therein
  • FIG. 23 (b) is a central sectional view of the spool;
  • Fig. 24 (a) and Fig. 24 (b) are diagrams illustrating the locking structure between the spool and the film
  • Figure 25 is a diagram showing the locked state of the film tail end
  • Figure 26 is a process block diagram of the reuse method
  • FIG. 27 is a perspective view schematically showing an apparatus for separating and locking a film
  • FIG. 28 is a plan view showing an example of a tip of a separation and locking jig
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the device for separating and locking the film.
  • FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b) are diagrams for explaining a state in which the tail end of the film is separated; The graph shows the relationship between the film tension and the insertion amount of the separation and locking jig when separating the tail end of the film;
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the device for separating and locking the film;
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the device for separating and locking the film;
  • Fig. 4 (a) and Fig. 34 (b) are diagrams explaining the state of locking the film tail end;
  • Fig. 35 is a data tape that stores the relationship between one type of pawl and the spool structure. Figure showing an example of a file;
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a processing flow at the time of type determination in a reuse system.
  • Fig. 1 is a cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the gate opening
  • Fig. 1 (b) is a side view of Fig. 1 (a) viewed from the direction I
  • Fig. 2 is Fig. 1 (b).
  • Fig. 3 is a side view of the patrone viewed from the II direction
  • Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the used patrone.
  • the most representative 135mm film pocket for storing 35mm photographic film is shown.
  • the patrone 1 is configured such that a spool 1B is built in a patrone body 1A formed into a cylindrical shape using a steel plate, and caps a1 and a1 are caulked and fixed to both sides thereof.
  • An opening a2 is formed at the center of each cap a1, and each hub 1 and b2 of the spool 1B projecting from both ends thereof are supported by projecting from the opening a2 to the outside.
  • the gate opening body 1A is formed by overlapping the inner surfaces of both ends of a steel plate rolled into a cylindrical shape with a gap therebetween, bending the overlapped portion in the same direction, and in the circumferential direction of the gate opening 1 body 1A.
  • a photographic film (not shown) that extends and forms a gap in the overlapping portion Picture 44
  • slit opening a3 for taking in and out, and the slit opening a3 is provided with a telemump a4 for providing light shielding.
  • flanges b3 and b3 are provided at both ends of a take-up shaft b2 for winding a photographic film, and eight b1 and b2 are provided concentrically outside thereof.
  • the hubs b 1 and b 2 are built into the patrone main unit 1 A, and the protruding side hub b 1 that protrudes greatly from the pat door main unit 1 A and the non-projecting that does not protrude from the patrone main unit 1 A
  • the former protruding side hub b1 is referred to as a long hub
  • the latter non-protruding side hub b2 is referred to as a short hub.
  • a slit-shaped spool hole b4 into which the leading end of the photographic film is inserted is formed in the take-up shaft b2, and a locking claw b5 and a locking claw b5 are locked in the spool hole b4.
  • a holding rib b6 for preventing the photographic film from coming off is provided in an opposed shape.
  • two locking claws b5 are provided at predetermined intervals in the spool hole b4, and only one pressing rib b6 is provided therebetween.
  • the number and shape of 5 and the holding rib b 6 are not particularly limited.
  • the DX Percode a5 for identifying the type and sensitivity of photographic film stored in the patrone, the type of manufacturer, etc.
  • Conductive part with exposed metal background and painted insulating part are provided in a checkered pattern on the surface of the main body 1A, and the type of photographic film, such as sensitivity and number of photographic films, stored inside is arranged by the arrangement pattern.
  • a CAS code a6 for recording information is provided.
  • the patrol mouth 1 shown in the figure is provided with a bar code a7 for product identification that is unique to the Konica Patrone, in addition to the DX bar code a5 and the CAS code a6. 44
  • the used pawl 1 is cut off near slit a3 with the photographic film locked on the spool, and a part of the tail end film F is cut off. It is in a state of protruding from slit opening a3.
  • the used patrone 1 is inspected.
  • FIG. 4 is a process block diagram showing a flow of an inspection method according to the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic configuration diagram of an inspection system.
  • the inspection step includes an alignment and positioning step 100, a sorting step 200, an appearance inspection step 300, an internal inspection step 400, and a recovery step 500. It is configured.
  • the order of the appearance inspection step 300 and the internal inspection step 400 is not particularly limited.
  • the details of each inspection process will be described with reference to the configuration of the patrone shown in FIGS. 1 (a) to 3 and the schematic configuration diagram of the inspection system shown in FIG.
  • the used patrone 1 collected from the laboratory is transported to the main inspection step in a state of being stored in a container 10 such as a hopper.
  • a container 10 such as a hopper.
  • the cartridges 1 are aligned in the axial direction of their spools 1B so that each cartridge 1 can be easily inspected, and the slits a3 of each cartridge 1 are all in the same position. Perform positioning so that
  • the alignment and positioning step 100 shown in the present embodiment includes an axial alignment and transport step 101 and a rotational direction positioning step 102.
  • a part feeder (not shown)
  • the spool 1B is aligned in the axial direction at the patrol port 1 using an appropriate alignment supply device.
  • the aligned patrone 1 is then rotated In the placement step 102, as shown in FIG. 6, they are individually stored in buckets 20, respectively.
  • a plurality of buckets 20 are mounted on the conveyor BC and are configured to accommodate most of the cartridge 1 except for the slit port a3, and the cartridge 1 is attached to the spool 1B in the bucket 20.
  • the slit port a 3 comes into contact with the upper edge 20 a of the bucket 20, and the direction of the slit port a 3 is fixed at that position, and the slit port a 3 of the patrone 1 is fixed. Are positioned so that they all face the same side. Each of the cartridges 1 positioned in this manner is transported to the next step by driving the transport conveyor BC while being stored in the bucket 20.
  • the patrone 1 aligned and positioned in the alignment and positioning step 100 is sent to a separation step 200, where it is separated into a conforming product and a non-conforming product prior to inspection.
  • the classification of conforming products and non-conforming products here means that the patrone is sieved in advance before executing the subsequent inspection items, for example, when the patrol port 1 is a product of another company. This can be performed by reading the DX bar code a5 provided on the surface of the tablet 1.
  • the DX bar code a5 is a standardized information code common to all companies, and as shown in FIG. 6, the reading window 21 formed in the bucket 20 is stored in the bucket 20.
  • the DX barcode a5 on the patrone 1 surface is exposed to the outside.
  • a barcode reader 30 By reading this DX barcode using a barcode reader 30, it is possible to automatically identify the type of product, such as a product of its own or a product of another company.
  • the type of photographic film stored in the patrone 1 for example, color, black and white, sepia, reversal, etc., may be determined, and accordingly, a conforming product and a non-conforming product may be separated. It is also preferable to discriminate at this stage even the reading error of the DX code a5.
  • a switching gate 31 is provided on the transport path in the separation step 200, and the patrone 1 that has passed through the separation step 200 is pushed out of the bucket 20 by a pusher (not shown) in the axial direction and switched. Transferred to gate 31.
  • the non-conforming product based on the information read by the barcode reader 30 is discharged out of the process, and only the conforming product is transferred to the next process.
  • the switching gate 31 when reusing a patrol mouth when collecting a production loss product generated in the process of manufacturing a patrone or an expired product expired in a store or the like, the switching gate 31 is used for the re-use. It can be joined to the inspection process.
  • the above-mentioned lost or expired patrone 1a collected from factories and stores is cut off before merging because it contains unused photo film Fa. For this reason, the film cartridges of the recovered production loss products and expired products are cut in the film feeding and cutting step 600.
  • the collected film 1a is fed by the feeding rollers 11 and 11 and the photographic film Fa is fed by the rollers 11 and cut by the cutter 12 so that only the tail end film remains.
  • the patrone 1a is joined from the switching gate 31 to perform an inspection similarly to the used patrone 1 collected from the laboratory.
  • the patrol port of the production loss product or expired product merged from the switching gate 31 is also referred to as “patrone 1”.
  • the compliant patrone 1 that passed the separation process 200 is sent to the next appearance inspection process 300, where the patrone 1 is inspected for its appearance without being disassembled.
  • the appearance inspection process 300 shown in the present embodiment includes a tail edge film presence inspection process 301, a slit opening deformation inspection process 302, an overall height inspection process 303, an outer peripheral deformation inspection process 304, and a CAS pattern. It is configured to include a one-step detection step 305. Note that the order of these steps 301 to 305 is arbitrary.
  • Each of the above steps 301 to 305 is arranged at a predetermined position on a rotatable inspection tray 40.
  • the patrol machine 1 After passing through the sorting step 200, the patrol machine 1 is pushed out of the switching gate 31 in the axial direction by a pusher (not shown), and is transferred to the inspection pallet 40 to hold the pawl opening 1. It is transferred to the attached holding means 80.
  • the holding means 80 is attached to the surface of the inspection turret 40, and has a housing 81 for housing the patrone 1 and a shaft with respect to the housing 81. And an opening / closing section 83 provided so as to be openable / closable centered at 82.
  • the opening 1 is housed in the housing 81 from the opened opening / closing section 83 with the slit a3 facing the opposite side to the shaft section 82, and then the opening / closing section 83 Is closed, so that the slit slot a 3 is exposed to the outside from the holding means 80 while being sandwiched between the edge of the housing portion 81 and the edge of the opening / closing portion 83.
  • the patrone 1 is held by the holding means 80 and conveyed between the above-described steps by the rotation of the detection turret 40.
  • the patrone 1 transferred from the switching gate 31 to the holding means 80 is subjected to the first trailing edge film presence / absence inspection step 301 by rotating the detection turret 40 clockwise.
  • tail end film presence inspection step 301 the presence or absence of the tail end film F is inspected.
  • the tail end film F is necessary. As shown in Fig. 3, the tail end film F is cut off near the slit slot a3 of the patrone 1, so that the tail end film F is entangled in the pat slot 1 in the process of being transported to the main inspection step. It may be rare. Therefore, before inspecting the presence or absence of the tail end film F, slightly rotate the spool 1B in the film unwinding direction so that the tail end film F can be taken out of the cartridge 1 from the slit opening a3. deep. Therefore, as shown in Fig.
  • a spool rotating means having a rotating shaft 41 for inserting the spool 1B into the short hub b2 side and rotating the spool 1B.
  • the rotating shaft 41 in the spool 1B By rotating the rotating shaft 41 in the spool 1B in the unwinding direction of the tail end film F by the spool turning means, the tail end film F is moved out of the slit roller a3. I'm out.
  • a torque detecting means 42 such as a torque meter or a torque limiter for detecting the torque at the time of rotation of the rotating shaft 41 is provided. The rotation is stopped.
  • ribs b7, b8 are provided in a single character inside the hubs b1, b2 of the spool 1B. Using the direction of the rib b7 or b8, it is also possible to detect excessive rotation of the spool 1B. That is, since the direction of the opening of the spool hole b4 in which the tail end film F is locked can be known from the direction of the ribs b7 and b8, the rib b7, b 8 direction 7144
  • phase is detected, and the phase of the spool 1B when the tail end film F is completely discharged from the direction of the rib b7 or b8 is detected, and the spool 1B is detected at that phase.
  • the rotation of the rotation shaft 41 may be controlled so as to stop. Since the orientations of the ribs b7 and b8 differ depending on the manufacturer of the patrone 1, the results of reading the DX barcode using the barcode 30 in the sorting step 200 are stored. Here, based on the maker information of the read result, the position of the ribs b7 and b8 of the spool 1B when the tail end film F is completely discharged for each patrone 1 may be determined and switched. preferable.
  • the phase of the spool 1B is fixed as appropriate so that the tail end film F is not re-engaged in the cartridge 1 while the cartridge 1 is being conveyed in the process. It is preferable to keep it fixed by using a means.
  • a tail end film detecting means 43 comprising an optical detection device such as a photoelectric sensor is disposed near the slit a3 of the patrone 1. After unwinding the film F, the tail-end film detecting means 43 automatically detects whether the tail-end film F is coming out of the patrol opening 1 or not. Here, products that are not exposed at the tail end film F where the tail end film F is not detected are to be discharged out of the process as NG products.
  • the pawl opening 1 where the presence of the tail end film F is confirmed is sent to the slit opening deformation inspection process 302 by rotation of the inspection let 40.
  • a displacement gauge 44 is arranged near the slit opening a3 of the patrone 1, and it is inspected whether the slit opening a3 is deformed.
  • the displacement meter 4 4 may be either a contact type or a non-contact type. Patrones whose slit slit a3 is deformed and non-standard sized products are to be discharged out of the process as NG products.
  • the patrone 1 that has passed the deformation inspection of the slit a3 is sent to the full height inspection process 303 by rotating the inspection turret 40.
  • a displacement meter 45 is arranged close to the patrone 1, and the whole height of the patrone 1 is inspected by the displacement meter 45.
  • the displacement meter 45 may be either a contact type or a non-contact type. The displacement meter 45 inspects whether the cap a2 is not lifted up and whether the patrone 1 has been crushed, and discharges nonconforming products out of the process as NG products. Products to be released.
  • the patrol mouth 1 that has passed the height inspection is sent to the outer peripheral deformation inspection process 304 by rotation of the inspection let 40.
  • the outer peripheral deformation inspection step 304 the surface of the gate opening 1 is inspected.
  • an image recognition means 46 such as a CCD camera is arranged close to the gate 1 so that the entire periphery of the gate 1 is image-recognized and stored in advance.
  • a laser displacement meter may be used to detect the entire circumference of the surface of the gate 1.
  • products that do not conform to the inspection are to be discharged as NG products out of the process.
  • the pawl opening 1 that has passed the outer peripheral deformation inspection is sent to the CAS pattern inspection step 305 by rotating the inspection turret 40.
  • the conductive insulation pattern of the CAS code a6 provided on the surface of the cartridge 1 is checked using the stylus probe 47a.
  • a reading window 84 for reading the CAS code a 6 is formed in the holding means 80 for holding the cartridge 1 being conveyed, and the reading window 84 is formed from the reading window 84.
  • the CAS code a6 of Patrone 1 is exposed.
  • the stylus probe 47a abuts by moving forward from the reading window 84 toward the CAS code a6, and reads the code information.
  • the CAS code a6 records type discrimination information such as the sensitivity and number of sheets of photographic film stored in the camera. A melody loaded with a patrone detects this CAS code a6 By doing so, information such as the sensitivity and the number of photographic films can be obtained automatically. Therefore, the unexposed film newly stored in the patrone 1 also needs to have the same sensitivity and number of sheets as those recorded in the CAS code a6. By reading the code a6, the result of the reading is separately stored so that the type of the port 1 can be used when the unexposed film is locked in the subsequent process.
  • the reading window 84 is provided with the barcode for identifying the type.
  • the bar code a 7 may also be formed so as to be readable, and the bar code a 7 may be read using a bar code reader 47 b.
  • the product is to be discharged out of the process as an NG product.
  • the inspection turret 40 rotates to a transfer position where the compliant cartridge 1 is transferred to the next process and stops.
  • a delivery turret 50 is provided, and a pat port 1 of a conforming product in each of the above steps is received from the inspection turret 40, and the next internal inspection step 40 is performed by rotating at a predetermined angle. Transfer to 0.
  • the products to be discharged in each of the above steps are discharged from the inspection turret 40 at a position where the inspection turret 40 is further rotated. It may be discharged from the inspection turret 40 each time it is determined. (4) Internal inspection process
  • the patrone 1 that has passed the visual inspection process 300 is subjected to internal inspection by rotating the inspection turret 60 disposed adjacent to the delivery evening let 50 via the delivery evening let 50. It is sent to step 400.
  • the internal inspection step 400 shown in the present embodiment includes a light leakage inspection step 401 and a foreign matter inspection step 402, where the internal inspection is performed without disassembling the cartridge 1. .
  • the order of the steps 401 and 402 is arbitrary.
  • Fig. 9 shows a conceptual diagram of the light leakage inspection in the light leakage inspection step 401.
  • housings 61 and 61 are provided so as to sandwich the patrone 1 from both sides, and both sides of the transferred pat opening 1 are connected to each hub b 1 and b of the spool 1B. 2 is completely shaded and covered.
  • Light sources 62 and 62 are provided in each of the housings 61 and 61, and the light sources 62 and 62 are turned on so that light of a predetermined illuminance is emitted from the direction of the spool axis of the cartridge 1. I have.
  • a light amount detecting means 63 composed of a photosensitive element such as CCD is disposed near the slit a3 of the cartridge 1, and detects the amount of light leaking from the slit a3.
  • the detected value is sent to the light leakage determining means 64, and the degree of light leakage is determined by comparing the detected value with a predetermined reference value. As a result, if light leakage is detected exceeding the reference value, the product is to be discharged out of the process as an NG product.
  • the inspection environment is a dark room (dark box), and the tail end film F is properly held from the slit a3 so as not to be in the way when measuring the light amount. It is preferable that the posture is kept constant by using.
  • the patrone 1 that has passed the light leakage inspection step 401 is sent to the foreign matter inspection step 402 by the rotation of the inspection lenslet 60.
  • the presence or absence of foreign substances such as sand particles that have entered the patrone 1 is inspected.
  • FIG. 10 shows a conceptual diagram of the foreign substance inspection in the foreign substance inspection step 402.
  • Appropriate vibrating means 66 such as a vibrator for applying vibration of a predetermined frequency to the body of the patrone 1 while being held at 5 is provided.
  • noise detection means 67 composed of an acoustic detection probe (for example, a microphone) for detecting noise is brought into contact with the surface of the door opening 1, and vibration is applied by the vibration means 66. Detected noise inside the patrone 1.
  • the vibration frequency given by the vibration means 66 is not constant but variable. If foreign matter such as sand particles has entered the patrone 1 here, the noise detected by the noise detecting means 67 is larger than a predetermined normal value (reference value). Is compared with a reference value by means of foreign matter presence / absence determination means 68. If the detected noise exceeds the reference value, it is regarded as a product to be discharged out of the process as an NG product with foreign matter.
  • the inspection turret 60 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, and the conformable patrone 1 that has passed the inspection is transferred to the next process.
  • the products to be discharged in the above steps 401 and 402 are discharged from the inspection tray 60 at the position where the inspection turret 60 is further rotated. Each time a nonconforming product is determined in each of the steps 401 and 402, it may be discharged from the inspection turret 60 each time.
  • the patrone 1 that has passed the internal inspection step 400 is sent to the collection step 500 from the inspection turret 60 at a predetermined position.
  • they are classified and collected according to the type of the pat code 1 read from the CAS code or the product identification barcode.
  • trays 70a and 70b capable of storing a plurality of patrones 1 at a time are placed on an XY stage (not shown) that can move in the XY direction. Due to the movement in the XY direction, either tray 70a, 70b is located at the cartridge discharge position of the detector pallet 60 and can receive the cartridge 1.
  • a spool is inserted into the short hub b2 of the spool 1B of the cartridge 1 to hold the spool 1B so that it cannot rotate.
  • a shaft fixing projection 71 protrudes from each of the pat ports 1 to be stored, and each of the pat ports 1 of the conforming product transferred from the inspection turret 60 is provided with a spool shaft fixing boss. 7 Fit into 1 and store and hold.
  • the patrone 1 transferred from the inspection turret 60 is divided into trays 70a and 70b for each type.
  • the types of patrones that can be divided here are: And brands.
  • a single tray may store a plurality of types of patrones 1 at a time by dividing the tray into types.
  • each cartridge 1 is fixed in trays 70a and 70b so that the phase of spool 1B and the direction of slit slot a3 are all aligned.
  • the trays 70a and 70b can also be used as return boxes, and transport from the inspection process in a state where a plurality of patrones 1 are stored.
  • the patroller 1 is a patrone that can be used as a reused product by loading unexposed film.
  • the film is transferred to a step of loading an unexposed film.
  • Fig. 13 (a) is a perspective view showing the external configuration of the photo patrol door
  • Fig. 13 (b) is a cross-sectional view thereof
  • Fig. 14 (a) is a spool housed in the cartridge.
  • FIG. 14 (b) is a central sectional view of the spool.
  • 135 film cartridge that holds the most typical 35 mm photographic film.
  • the patrone 1 is configured such that a spool 1B is built in a patrone body 1A formed into a cylindrical shape using a steel plate, and caps a1 and a1 are caulked and fixed to both sides thereof.
  • An opening a2 is formed at the center of each cap a1, and each hub b1, b1 protruding at both ends of the spool 1B is supported by projecting outside from the opening a2. And it is rotatable inside the cartridge body 1A.
  • the patrone main body 1A overlaps the inner surfaces of both ends of a cylindrically rolled steel plate with a gap therebetween, and folds the overlapped portion in the same direction and
  • the main body 1A extends in the circumferential direction, and the gap formed in the overlapping portion becomes a slit a3 for inserting and removing a photographic film (not shown).
  • the slit a3 has a light shielding property. There is a telep for a4.
  • the spool 1B is provided with flanges b3, b3 at both ends of a take-up shaft b2 for winding a photographic film, and concentrically provided with hubs b1, b1, respectively at the outside thereof.
  • a slit-shaped spool hole b4 into which the leading end of the photographic film is inserted is formed in the take-up shaft b2, and a locking claw b5 and a locking claw b5 are locked in the spool hole b4.
  • a holding rib b6 for preventing the detached photographic film from being provided is provided in opposition.
  • two locking claws b5 are provided at predetermined intervals in the sprue hole b4, and the holding rib b6 is located between the two.
  • the number and shape of the locking claw b5 and the holding rib b6 are not particularly limited.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a manufacturing apparatus suitable for carrying out the photographic film manufacturing method according to the first aspect of the present invention.
  • reference numeral 29 denotes a patrone holder for holding the patrone 1, and the patrone 1 is held in the patrone holder 29 so that the slit opening a3 faces the film shot 22 described later. It is set.
  • the film chute 22 for supplying the photographic film to the patrone 1 is linearly arranged so that one end faces the slit a3 of the patone 1 held by the patrone holder 29.
  • the film chute 22 is slidable along a direction in which the film chute 22 is disposed via a slide member 24 slidable along the guide rail 23. Therefore, the film chute 22 is slid by a driving means (not shown), so that the tip of the film chute 22 is set in the gate opening holder 29.
  • Rhone 1 can be separated from and separated from Slitstro a 3.
  • 22 a and 22 a are film feed rollers for contacting the photographic film in the film chute 22 and transferring the photographic film toward the slit a 3 of the patrone 1. They are disposed vertically opposite to each other and are driven by driving means (not shown).
  • a guide member 3 serving as a guide for the operation is provided.
  • the guide member 3 is formed by connecting a flat rear guide portion 3b and a flat rear guide portion 3b at a predetermined angle to the flat front guide portion 3a. It is shaped like a letter. It is preferable that the tip guide portion 3a and the rear end guide portion 3b are connected by a curved portion 3c having a predetermined radius, and the tip guide portion 3a, the curved portion 3c and the rear end guide are connected.
  • the portion 3b is formed to have substantially the same width as the width of the slit opening a3. These can be easily formed integrally by bending and using a thin metal plate.
  • the inner angle formed by the planes of the front end guide portion 3a and the rear end guide portion 3b is 110 ° ⁇ 20 °.
  • the guide member 3 is out of the above range, when the guide member 3 is inserted from the slit opening a3 into the patrol opening 1, the leading end guide portion 3a is moved to the position shown in FIG. 14 (a), FIG. 14 (b). It is difficult to guide the photographic film to the spool hole b4 without going to the spool hole b4 of the spool 1B shown in the figure. More preferably, it is 110 ° ⁇ 5 °, most preferably 110 °.
  • the distal end of the distal end guide portion 3a is cut off on both sides, and the spool 1B It is formed in a narrow shape so as to substantially match the width of the hole b4.
  • a block 25 for supporting the guide member 3 is slidably provided by driving means (not shown) along a film feeding direction by the film chute 22.
  • a rotation shaft 26 projects from the block 25 to a position between the slit opening a3 of the cartridge 1 and the tip of the film chute 22 so as to be rotatable by driving means (not shown).
  • the block 25 has an elongated hole 25a cut out in the vertical direction, and the rotating shaft 26 projects from the elongated hole 25a so that the elongated hole 25a is formed. It is possible to move up and down along a. The amount of protrusion of the rotating shaft 26 from the block 25 is slid so that the block 25 is juxtaposed to the side of the patrone holder 29 (the leftmost position in FIG. 15), and However, even when the rotating shaft 26 is lowered to the lowermost end of the slot 25a, the tip of the rotating shaft 26 is attached to either the cartridge holder 29 or the pocket 1 held by it. It is assumed that they do not touch.
  • a mounting arm 26a protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating shaft 26 extends along the axial direction thereof.
  • the guide member 3 has a front end guide portion 3a whose front end faces the slit opening a3 of the patrone 1 set in the patrone holder 29, and whose rear end guide portion 3b faces the slit opening a3. 1
  • the outer surface on the rear end side of the rear end guide portion 3b so that it is inclined to the A side (lower side in the figure), that is, the inside bent in a substantially rectangular shape is arranged on the lower side in the figure. Is attached to the mounting arm 26a, and is rotated substantially along the curved portion 3c of the guide member 3 by the rotation of the rotation shaft 26 (first 17 (a)). See figure).
  • the pivot shaft 26 is arranged so that the distal end guide portion 3a of the guide member 3 is opposed to the patrone body 1A of the slit a3 of the patrone 1 set in the patrone holder 122. (The state shown in Fig. 17 (a)) and the position where the rear end guide portion 3b of the guide member 3 is parallel to the extension direction of the slit opening a3 (first position). 7 (c) state clockwise and counterclockwise.
  • a method of manufacturing a photographic film using the manufacturing apparatus will be described.
  • a spool 1B is built in, and both sides are covered with caps a1 and a1, respectively.
  • the patrone 1 has its slit opening a 3 located at the upper part of the drawing and a film chute.
  • the spool 1B is arranged and held so as to face the tip of the spool 22. Further, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), the inlet side of the spool hole b4 faces the root direction of the slit port a3 as shown in FIG. 17 (a). At the right position and locked using appropriate position locking means.
  • the rotating shaft 26 descends the long hole 25 a from the state shown in FIG. 17 (a).
  • the guide member 3 attached to the tip is disposed near the slittro a3 of the patrone 1.
  • the guide member 3 has its leading end guide portion 3a parallel to the extending direction of the slit roller a3 with respect to the cartridge body 1A (the direction in which the film is fed by the film chute 22), and the trailing end guide portion 3b has the slit groove portion 3b. It is held so that it is located on the part 1A side (lower side in the figure) of the pat mouth body a3.
  • the rotating shaft 26 stops descending.
  • the block 25 advances in the same direction as the film feeding direction, and the leading end guide portion of the guide member 3 attached to the rotating shaft 26.
  • the rotation shaft 26 When the insertion of the guide member 3 is started, the rotation shaft 26 repeatedly rotates clockwise and counterclockwise alternately within a small angle range halfway through the insertion, and simultaneously with the forward movement of the block 25, the guide member 3 is swung so that the guide member 3 can be smoothly inserted.
  • the block 25 becomes the rotating shaft 26.
  • the guide member 3 is rotated counterclockwise in the drawing toward the inclined side so that the rear end guide portion 3 b of the guide member 3 is parallel to the extending direction of the slit opening a 3. While the guide member 3 is further advanced until the rear end guide portion 3b is inserted into the slit opening a3.
  • the distal end of the distal end guide portion 3a of the guide member 3 moves toward the spool 1B in the opening 1 and comes close to the vicinity of the inlet of the spool hole b4.
  • the film chute 22 and the film feed roller 22 a also move forward along the guide rail 23 toward the patrol opening 1, and the leading end of the film shoot 22 extends into the slit of the cartridge 1. Stop at a position close to mouth a3 (see Fig. 17 (c)).
  • the unexposed photographic film F is fed out through the film chute 22 by the film feed roller 22a.
  • the photographic film F sent from the leading end of the film chute 22 contacts the guide member 3 inserted into the slit a 3 of the pawl opening 1 while contacting along the inclined side (lower side in the figure) of the guide member 3. Inserted into slit a3. That is, the photographic film F is inserted into the slit a3 along the lower surface of the rear end guide portion 3b of the guide member 3 which is partially protruded from the slit a3 of the patrol opening 1, and then the curved portion 3 c Four
  • the photographic film F whose leading end is guided to the spool hole b4 is provided with each of the locking claws b5 provided in the spool hole b4 shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b).
  • the locking holes formed in the leading end of the photographic film F are locked with b5 and b5 (see FIG. 17 (d)).
  • the photographic film F in the film shoot 22 does not retract because it is locked on the spool 1B.
  • the block 25 starts to retreat, and the rear end guide portion 3 b of the guide member 3 attached to the rotating shaft 26 is pulled out from the slit a 3 of the cartridge 1.
  • the rear end guide portion 3b is pulled out in a straight line parallel to the extending direction of the slit slot a3 by the retreat of the block 25.
  • the rotating shaft 26 repeats rotating within a minute angle range as in the case of insertion, so that the guide member 3 is pulled out together with the block member 25 so that the guide member 3 can be pulled out smoothly. Rock it.
  • the block 25 is gradually rotated at the same time as the retreating operation and the rotating shaft 26 is rotated so that the distal end guide portion 3 a of the guide member 3 is parallel to the extending direction of the slit b a 3. 3 is turned clockwise in the figure toward the inclined side, and then the distal end guide portion 3a is pulled straight out, and the guide member 3 is taken out from the slit opening a3.
  • the front end guide portion 3a and the rear end guide portion 3b of the guide member 3 are respectively drawn out in a straight line along the plane, so that the insertion operation is not performed.
  • the photographic film F located in the film chute 22 is directed toward the cartridge 1 with the bending of the film path line. Will move. Therefore, by detecting the movement of the photographic film F at this time by appropriate means, it is possible to automatically detect that the leading end of the photographic film F is securely locked to the spool 1B. is there.
  • the rotating shaft 26 moves up along the long hole 25a to retract the guide member 3 upward from the film path line.
  • the pass line of the photographic film F becomes straight (see Fig. 17 (f) and Fig. 17 (g)).
  • the photographic film F locked on the spool 1B is wound up by rotating the spool 1B of the patrone 1 and the film feed roller 22a.
  • the photographic film F does not come into contact with the guide member 3 at the time of winding, and the photographic film F is damaged. There is no need to worry about the occurrence.
  • the photographic film is completed by winding the photographic film F.
  • a manufacturing apparatus suitable for use in carrying out the manufacturing method according to the second aspect has a different configuration of the guide member in the manufacturing apparatus 2 described in the first aspect.
  • the guide member 4 has a hollow shape having an upper guide plate 41 located on the upper side in the figure, a lower guide plate 42 located on the lower side in the figure, and side guide portions 43 and 44 shielding both sides thereof.
  • a front end guide portion 4a extending linearly formed by an upper guide plate 41, a lower guide plate 42, and side guide portions 43, 44 at a front end thereof, and a rear end.
  • the rear guide 4b which is formed by the upper guide plate 41, the lower guide plate 42, and the side guides 43, 44, which are linearly formed, is inclined at a predetermined angle. It is connected in a substantially rectangular shape having a curved portion 4c having a predetermined radius between the leading end guide portion 4a and the trailing end guide portion 4b. Is formed.
  • the ends of the upper guide plate 41 and the lower guide plate 42 in the front end guide portion 4a are cut off on both sides, and substantially match the width of the spool hole b4 of the spool 1B. It is formed in a narrow shape as shown in FIG.
  • the inner angle ⁇ formed by the planes of the front end guide portion 4a and the rear end guide portion 4b is 110 ° ⁇ 20 °, more preferably 110 °, for the same reason as the guide member 3. 5 °, most preferably 110 °.
  • the guide member 4 is attached to the attachment arm 26a of the rotating shaft 26 projecting from the block 25 in the same manner as the guide member 3 in the first aspect described above.
  • a manufacturing apparatus suitable for use in carrying out the manufacturing method according to the third aspect is different from the manufacturing apparatus described in the first aspect in the configuration of the guide member and the periphery thereof.
  • FIG. 19 shows the structure of the guide member and its surroundings.
  • 13 (a) to 17 (g) indicate the same components.
  • the guide member 5 has a structure in which two guide members 3 in the first aspect described above are prepared and stacked vertically at a predetermined interval, and an upper guide plate 51 located on the upper side of the drawing is provided.
  • a film path P is formed by a gap with the lower guide plate 52 located on the lower side in the figure.
  • the upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52 are, like the guide member 3 in the first aspect described above, respectively flat-shaped guide members 51a and 52a, respectively.
  • the guides 51b and 52b are connected at a predetermined angle in an inclined manner, and between the front guides 51a and 52a and the rear guides 51b and 52b. It has a substantially rectangular shape provided with curved portions 51c and 52c having a predetermined radius.
  • the lower surface shown at the rear end of the lower guide plate 52 is attached via a mounting arm 27a to a lower rotation shaft 27 provided in an elongated hole 25a of the block 25, and
  • the illustrated upper surface of the rear end of the guide plate 51 is attached via an attachment arm 28a to an upper rotation shaft 28 similarly provided in the elongated hole 25a of the block 25.
  • the upper rotation shaft 28 has a downward U-shaped concave portion 28 b fitted to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical lower rotation shaft 27, and the upper rotation shaft 28
  • the upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52 are installed side by side so as to overlap each other with an interval corresponding to the film path p therebetween while being fitted to the outer peripheral surface of the side rotation shaft 27.
  • the rotating shaft 28 can rotate integrally and concentrically with the lower rotating shaft 27.
  • the guide member 5 becomes rotatable as a whole, and when the upper rotation shaft 28 and the lower rotation shaft 27 are separated from each other in the elongated hole 25a and the fitting is released,
  • the upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52 are vertically separated from each other, and the film path P therebetween is largely opened.
  • the guide member 5 performs insertion and removal operations with respect to the slit a3 of the patrone 1 in a state where the upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52 are juxtaposed so as to overlap with each other. Since the inserting operation and the removing operation are the same as the case of the guide member 3 in the first aspect described above, the description of the overlapping portions is omitted, and the different portions are shown in FIGS. 14 to 18. This will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the guide member 5 is in a state in which the upper rotation shaft 28 is fitted to the lower rotation shaft 27, that is, the upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52 have a film path p therebetween.
  • the cartridge holder is operated by the same operation as in the case of the first viewpoint described above so that the leading ends of the leading end guide portions 51a and 52a approach the spool hole b4. It is inserted into slitro a3 of patrone 1 which is set to one 29 (see FIG. 20 (a)).
  • the photographic film F is sent out through the advancing film chute 22.
  • the photographic film F sent out from the tip of the film chute 2 2 passes through the film passage P formed in the guide member 5 inserted into the slit opening a 3 of the cartridge 1, and the slit film a 3 Is inserted into.
  • the photographic film F can smoothly reach the spool hole b4 of the spool 1B without bending during the insertion process. It is guided and locked (see Fig. 20 (b)).
  • the block 9 starts retreating, and the guide member 5 is pulled out and rotated in the same manner as in the case of the first aspect described above, and the guide member 5 is taken out from the gate 1 (20 (c)). See figure).
  • the photographic film F is bent downward in a V-shape along the film path line between the slit opening a3 and the film chute 22 as in the above case.
  • the upper rotation shaft 28 is separated from the lower rotation shaft 27 and rises along the long hole 25a of the block 25.
  • the photographic film F locked on the spool 1B is wound up by rotating the spool 1B of the patrone 1 and the film feed roller 22a to complete the photographic film.
  • the guide member 5 is taken out of the patrone 1 and the upper guide plate 51 is retracted from the film path line to open the film path p greatly. There is no risk of scratching the photo film F.
  • FIG. 1 Another embodiment of the guide member 5 in the third aspect is shown in FIG.
  • the drawing shows only a lower guide plate 52 different from the above guide member 5, and both side ends of the lower guide plate 52 have side guide portions 5 standing up toward the film passage p side. 3, 5 and 4 are formed.
  • the side guide portions 53 and 54 are formed so as to cover both sides of the film passage p when the upper guide plate 51 shown in FIG. 19 is overlapped with the film passage p. .
  • 5 3 and 5 4 support the both ends when the photographic film is inserted to form a lateral guide, enabling smoother feeding operation.
  • the upper guide plate 5 1 Since the lower guide plate 52 can be separated from the guide member 4, unlike the guide member 4 in the second aspect, the film can be wound up with the film path line after the guide member 4 is taken out in a straight line, Second point of view The risk of damaging the photographic film is smaller than that of the photographic film.
  • the side guide portions 53 and 54 are not limited to the illustrated form, and may be provided on the upper guide plate 51 side of the guide member 5.
  • one side guide portion 53 may be provided on the upper guide plate.
  • the guide plate 51 may be provided with the other side guide portion 54 separately on the lower guide plate 52.
  • the side guide portion may be formed so as to stand on the guide member 3 in the first aspect described above so as to face the side (the lower side in the figure) where the photographic film is in contact.
  • the both sides are supported and a lateral guide is formed, so that a smoother feeding operation can be performed.
  • the orientation of the cartridge 1 is set so that the slit a3 is positioned upward, but the cartridge is set so that the slit a3 is positioned downward.
  • the holder 21 may be set.
  • the guide members 3, 4, and 5 are also arranged upside down as shown in the figure, and the rotation of the guides 3, 4 and 5 is also reversed.
  • the aspects of the present invention described above are not limited to the case where a novel photographic film is manufactured.
  • the photo cartridge has a built-in spool and both sides are covered with caps, the same applies to used cartridges as well as lost cartridges and cartridges collected due to expiration. It is possible to reuse the patrone.
  • the film retained by the spool and remaining in the opening of the patrol opening is removed by tearing off the spool or the like, and then the above method may be applied.
  • FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing an external configuration of a 135 type photographic patrone
  • FIG. 23 (a) is a perspective view of a spool housed in the pat opening
  • FIG. The figure is a central sectional view of the spool.
  • the patrone 201 accommodates a spool 202 in a patrone body 210 formed in a cylindrical shape using a thin metal plate, and caulks and fixes caps 211 and 211 on both sides thereof. It is configured. An opening 211a is formed in the center of each cap 211, and the hubs 223a and 223b at both ends of the spool 202 are supported to form the inside of the notrone body 210. , The spool 202 is rotatably accommodated.
  • both ends of a metal thin plate rolled into a cylindrical shape extend in the circumferential direction, and a gap formed between the two thin plates serves as a slit roll 212 when the film F is taken in and out.
  • a mouthpiece 21 3 is provided for the mouth 2 12 to have a light-shielding property.
  • the spool 202 has flanges 222, 222 at both ends of a winding shaft 222 for winding the film, and a long hub 2223a and a short hub 2223b outside thereof. It is provided concentrically.
  • a slit hole 2 24 for inserting the tail end of the film is formed in the winding shaft 2 21, and a locking claw 2 25 and a holding rib 2 2 6 are formed in the slit hole 2 24. Is provided.
  • two locking claws 2 25 are provided at predetermined intervals in the slit hole 2 24, and one holding rib 2 26 is provided. Only provided.
  • the locking claws 2 2 5 and 2 2 5 and the holding rib 2 2 6 are arranged opposite to each other in the slit hole 2 24, and the holding rib 2 2 6 is attached to each locking claw 2 2 5
  • the protrusion heights of the locking claws 225, 225 and the holding rib 226 are set so as to overlap each other when viewed from the side, and each of the film claws 225, 225 has a film height.
  • the entry side surfaces 225a, 226a are formed in a tapered shape so that the tail end of the film inserted into the slit hole 224 is smoothly guided between the locking claws 225, 225 and the holding rib 226.
  • the structure for locking the spool 202 and the tail end of the film differs from the above-described embodiment depending on the type of the patrol port, such as a difference in manufacturer or a type. That is, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 24 (a), only one locking claw 225 for locking the film is provided in the slit hole 224, and the tail end of the film locked by the locking claw 225 is fixed to the slit. Two pressing ribs 226, 226 for pressing are provided to face the locking claw 225 so as to sandwich the locking claw 225 therebetween. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 24 (b), the number of the locking claws 225 is two, as in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). Two pressing ribs 226 are provided between the locking claws 225 and 225 so as to face the 225.
  • the intervals at which the locking claws 225 and the holding ribs 226 are arranged may be different.
  • the film is formed in a narrow shape in which the film tail end Fa side inserted into the spool hole 224 of the spool 202 is cut off on both sides as shown in FIG.
  • the case where the film tail end Fa is locked to the spool shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b) will be described.
  • Two locking holes Fb, Fb for locking with the respective locking claws 225, 225 are provided.
  • Each of the locking holes Fb, Fb corresponds to each of the locking claws 225, 2 of the spool 202.
  • the holding ribs 2 26 in the slit holes 2 24 are positioned between the respective locking claws 2 25, 2 25 with the film tail end Fa locked to the spool 202 in this manner.
  • the film tail end Fa is pressed toward the locking claws 2 25 and 2 25, and the film tail end Fa is accidentally disengaged from the locking claws 2 25 and 2 25. Has been prevented.
  • the used patrone 201 is cut off in the vicinity of the slit opening 212 while the film tail end Fa is locked on the spool 202, and a part of the film tail end Fa is cut into the slit slot 210. You are out of 1 2
  • the film hereinafter, referred to as an old film
  • the film locked on the spool 202 is removed from the patrone 201 in this state without disassembling the patrone 201 at all.
  • a new film By locking a new unexposed film (hereinafter, referred to as a new film) on the spool 202, it is possible to reuse the pato mouth 201.
  • the old film used in this specification is not limited to film that has been used (photographed), but may also be used for the collection of lost products produced during the manufacturing process of patrones with film or expired products that have expired at stores. Includes unused film locked in the patrone. Therefore, in the following description, the term "used pato mouth” refers to not only a used film but also a production loss product or an expired product in which an unused film is locked.
  • the type of 201 is determined.
  • the type of the patrone 201 determined here is mainly the strength of the patrol mouth 201. This is because the structure for locking the spool 202 and the film differs depending on the manufacturer, so that the removal and locking of the old film suitable for each machine can be performed.
  • the type of the patrone 201 may be determined.
  • the discrimination of the type of the patrol mouth 201 can be made by using the DX bar code (manufacturer, variety, etc.) recorded on the surface of the patron 201, the manufacturer's unique code, design, etc. This is done by reading.
  • the number of reuses (reuse) times is recorded in the No. ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ 0 0 1 1 1 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ .
  • a reading device such as a code reader for reading a code such as a bar code from the patrol port 201 and a patrol port 2 can be used.
  • a patrone such as an image recognition device or the like for recognizing the design by optically observing the appearance of 01 using a television camera or the like and comparing the type with a previously stored image.
  • Appropriate means according to the recording mode for the 201 surface can be used.
  • the locking structure between the spool 202 and the film according to the type is determined. Therefore, when removing the tail end of the old film from the patrol opening 201 and locking the new film in the subsequent process, it is necessary to select the most suitable jig according to the type of the patrone 201. It becomes possible.
  • the patrone 201 whose type has been determined is inspected in the next inspection step 250.
  • a part of the tail end of the old film locked on the spool 202 is formed by the slit opening 21 of the opening 21 1. Must be out of 2. So here, the tail end of the old film It is preferable to perform an inspection as to whether or not a part of the cartridge comes out of the slit opening 212 of the patrone 201.
  • Automated inspection is possible by using a photoelectric sensor as an inspection means for inspecting whether a part of the tail end of the old film is protruding from the slit opening 2 1 2 of the opening 21 2 It is.
  • the film is cut into the patrone 201 so that a part of the tail end of the old film coming out of the patrone 201 slit opening 212 does not enter the patrone 201.
  • a spool phase locking means for locking the phase of the spool 202.
  • the inspection at this time includes inspection of dirt (dust adhesion, cracks) on the surface of the pachinko mouth 201 by image recognition processing, and the slit mouth 211 and cap 211, It is also preferable to carry out a deformation inspection of the plastic mouth body 210, and also to perform a light-shielding condition inspection, a plastic mouth height inspection, a spool / cap clearance inspection, a CAS detection inspection, etc. It is also preferred.
  • This inspection may be performed simultaneously with the type determination in the type determination step 150.
  • the patrol mouth 201 passed in the inspection then separates the tail end of the old film locked on the spool 202. Prior to this separation, a plurality of types of patrol cartridges 201 are separated.
  • processing 1 it is preferable to select a jig suitable for each locking structure between the spool 202 and the tail end of the film. That is, the types determined in the first type determination step 150, that is, the structures of the locking claws 2 25 and the holding ribs 2 26 are, for example, shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b).
  • Figure 24 (a) to Figure 24 (b) The optimal jig configuration for removing the tail end of the old film from the spool 202 will naturally differ depending on whether it hits.
  • next jig selection step 350 the tail end of the old film is separated from the spool 202 and the new film is separated according to the type of the patrone 20 ⁇ determined in the type determination step 150. Select the jig for locking the to the spool 202.
  • the next film separation step 450 is a step of removing the old film from the patrone 201 using the above jig.
  • FIG. 27 shows an example of a separating means used for removing the old film from the patrone 201 in the film separating step 450.
  • reference numeral 351 denotes a patrone holder for holding the pat mouth 201.
  • the pocket 201 is held in the cartridge holder 351, and is formed at the tail end F1a of the old film coming out of the slit 21-2.
  • the two locking claws 3 52 a and 35 2 a of the tail end pulling member 35 2 are set to be locked in one foration F 1 c.
  • a film chute 3553 for supplying a new film to the patrone 201 is arranged so that one end faces the slit 211 of the patrone 201 held in the patrone holder 351.
  • a guide rail 354 is provided in parallel with the film chute 353.
  • a slide member 365 is slidably provided on the guide rail 355, and the slide member 355 is provided with an arm 355a disposed over the upper surface of the film chute 355.
  • the tail end pulling member 352 is attached to the lower surface of the arm portion 35a.
  • the guide rail 354 is provided with another slide member 356 so as to be slidable.
  • the slide member 356 has an arm 356a disposed over the upper surface of the film shoot 353, and is provided below the arm 356a.
  • a separating and locking jig 357 extending toward the above-mentioned gate opening 201 is attached to the surface.
  • the separation and locking jig 357 is formed in a thin plate shape having substantially the same width as the film, and the tip thereof has a slit 21 2 of the patrone 201 held by the patrone holder 35 1. 2, and is disposed so as to be inserted between the tail end pulling member 352 and the film shroud 353.
  • FIG. 1 An example of the separation and locking jig 357 is shown in FIG.
  • the leading end 357 a of the separation locking jig 357 is formed in a narrow shape with both sides cut off.
  • the separating and locking jig 357 has a distal end 357a having at least bending elasticity, and is formed using, for example, a 0.3 mm thick PET resin sheet.
  • the end of the tip 357 a is formed by a locking claw 2 25, 2 formed in a slit hole 2 24 of the spool 202 shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). It is divided into two according to the number of 25.
  • a triangular notch 3557b is formed at the tip 3557a, and a slit 3557c is formed linearly with a predetermined length at the deepest portion of the notch 3557b to form an end. Is divided into two.
  • the distal end 357a of the separating / locking jig 357 locks the slit hole 224 in the slit hole 224. It is necessary that the claws 2 25 and 2 25 do not rupture and that they do not push against the film tail end F 1 a locked on the spool 202. Therefore, the rigidity of the tip 357a of the separation locking jig 3557 is smaller than the rigidity of the spool resin and larger than the rigidity of the film.
  • reference numeral 358 denotes a feed roller for transferring a new film in the film chute 353 toward the slit 211 of the cartridge 201
  • reference numeral 359 denotes a cartridge. Attach and discharge tail edge F 1 a of old film removed from 1
  • the suction cup for suction and discharge at the tail end is capable of moving up and down on the upper surface of the film chute and moving between the upper surface and a position off the upper surface. It is said.
  • the slide member 356 is slid, and the separation / locking jig 357 is moved toward the slit 211 of the cartridge 201 (FIG. 29).
  • the tip 357 a of the separation and locking jig 3557 is moved from the slit opening 21 2 to the slit hole 2 24 of the spool 202 as shown in FIG. 30 (a).
  • it is inserted between the tail end F 1 a of the old film and each of the locking claws 2 25, 2 25.
  • the tip 357 a of the jig for separation and locking 3.57 a is pulled from the slit opening 2 1 2 of the nozzle 200 to the slit hole 2 2 4 of the spool 202 by pulling the tail end. While being guided by the tail end F1a of the old film, which is tensioned by the member 352, the bending elasticity allows it to be smoothly inserted along the film tail end F1a.
  • the old film Set the tension applied to the tail end F1a of the film to 0, or set the tail end F1a of the old film to the patrone 201 side.
  • the locking holes Fb and Fb of the tail end F1a are easily detached from the locking claws 2 25 and 25.
  • the tip 357 a of the separation locking jig 3557 is further inserted, it is guided over the taper of each of the locking claws 2 25, 2 25 and guided by the locking claws 2 25. Ride on top of, 2 2 5
  • the tip 357 a of the jig for separation and locking 35 7 is provided with a holding rib 2 2 provided in the slit hole 2 24 so as to face each of the locking claws 2 25 and 2 25. 6 and the two ends divided by the slit 357c are bent in a substantially V-shape as shown in Fig. 30 (b) due to bending elasticity. It acts so as to release the holding force in the direction of the locking claws 2 25, 2 25 by the ribs 2 26.
  • the leading end 357 a of the separation locking jig 357 becomes a state in which the outer side bent in a substantially V shape floats, and as a result, the tail end F 1 a of the old film is The pawls 2 25 and 2 25 are lifted from the outside of the pawls 2 25 and 2 25 to above. As a result, the locking holes Fb and Fb of the tail end F1a of the old film are floated from the locking claws 2 25 and 2 25, and the engagement between them is released.
  • the separation locking jig 3557 is inserted into the slit hole 24 of the spool 202, with the tip 3557a passing through the slit opening 21 of the gate opening 21. It remains sandwiched between the locking claws 2 25 and 2 25 and the holding rib 2 26.
  • the film separation and locking can be performed continuously as a series of steps. Preferred.
  • This new film F2 has a tail end structure corresponding to the locking structure of the spool 202, which has a locking hole that engages with each of the locking claws 222, 225 of the spool 202. are doing.
  • the tail end F2a of the new film supplied from the film chute 353 is supplied from the lower surface side of the separation locking jig 357 toward the slit 221 of the pat opening 201.
  • the patrone 201 while being guided by the lower surface of the separation and locking jig 357 with the leading end 357a inserted into the slit hole 224 of the spool 202. It is inserted up to the slit hole 222 of the spool 202 through the slit opening 212 (Fig. 34 (a)).
  • the jig for locking the new film F2 to the spool 202 should be the same as the jig for removing the tail end F1a of the old film from the spool 202. Also, the separation locking jig 35 7 7a whose tip 35 7a remains inserted into the slit hole 2 24 of the spool 202 when the tail end F 1a of the old film is separated. The new film F 2 is inserted into the slit hole 224 of the spool 202 from the slit 221 of the patrol opening 201 using the as a guide.
  • the tail end F2a of the new film which has been inserted up to the slit hole 222 of the spool 202, is inserted between the separation locking jig 357 and each of the locking claws 225, 225.
  • approximately V It is pushed down by the tip 357 a of the separating and locking jig 357 that is bent in the shape of a letter, and is locked in each of the locking holes F2b and F2b formed in the tail end F2a.
  • the claws 222 and 225 are locked (FIG. 34 (b)). This locks the new film F 2 on the spool 202.
  • the slide member 356 slides in the direction away from the patrone 201, and the separating and locking jig 357 is moved into the patrone 201 slit slot 21. Extract from 2.
  • the operation can be performed as it is with the patrone 201 held in the patrone holder 1351.
  • the tail end of the old film can be removed without disassembling the patrone at all, and the new film can be locked. , Can be wound up. Therefore, it is possible to greatly reduce the amount of waste when reusing the pato mouth.
  • the separation of the tail end F 1 a of the old film and the new film can be performed.
  • the jig for separating and locking 357 is inserted through the slit 2 1 2 With only one insertion, the old film tail edge Fla can be separated and the new film F2 can be locked as it is.When the new film F2 is locked, a new dedicated jig must be replaced. Also, it is not necessary to perform the film locking operation separately from the film separation operation, and the operation process can be simplified.
  • This reuse system is a systematization of a series of steps from the step 150 for discriminating the type of patrol mouth to the film winding step 650 in the method for reusing a photographic cartridge described above. A description of a portion overlapping with the description of the method for reusing the photo patrone will be omitted.
  • the locking structure between the spool and the film according to the type of the cartridge is automatically determined.
  • the determination of the locking structure can be realized by preparing a data table in which the type discriminating means stores in advance the relationship between the type of pawl and the spool structure.
  • the table has a patrone code column 151, a patrone type column 152, a spool structure column 153, and a used jig column 154.
  • the code information recorded in the DX bar code on the surface of the patrone is stored in the patrol port code field 151 in advance.
  • the patrone type column 152 stores the type of patrone for each of the above-described code information, for example, the type, the type, and the like of each item.
  • code information for example, the type, the type, and the like of each item.
  • four types of pato mouths, A, B, C, and D, are stored.
  • the spool structure column 153 stores information on the structure of the spool for each of the above-mentioned pat-mouth types ⁇ 152.
  • This spool structure column 15 3 is further divided into locking claw number column 15 3 a, locking claw spacing column 15 3 b, holding rib number column 15 3 c, and holding rib spacing column 15 3 d.
  • the used jig column 154 stores the type of jig most suitable for each patrone type having the spool structure specified in the spool structure column 153.
  • jigs three types of jigs, a, b, and c, are specified for patrone types A, B, C, and D.
  • the jig here is a separation-related jig that is common when the film is separated and when the film is locked.
  • a jig optimal for the patrone is automatically determined based on the data table.
  • a DX bar code recorded on the surface of the patrone is read by a barcode reader (S1). ).
  • the read information is referred to the data table shown in FIG. 35 (S 2).
  • the read code is "1 2 3 4", it is known that this patrone type is "A”, and the spool structure is as specified in the spool structure column 15 3. It turns out to be something.
  • the used jig is determined to be the “a” jig from the used jig column 154 (S 3).
  • the part is discharged as inapplicable to the present system (S4).
  • the patrone is separated into, for example, a storage tray or the like using an appropriate separating means for each type (S5).
  • the processing can be performed for each type of the separated cartridge, and the processing can be efficiently performed.
  • a tail end inspection or the like is performed in an inspection step 250, and the patrone that has passed the inspection is subjected to a jig selection step 350 in accordance with the patrone type based on the data table.
  • the jig determined according to is selected.
  • the selection of the jig is performed by setting the separation and locking jig 357 in the separation and locking means shown in FIG.
  • the separation and locking means may be prepared in multiple units for each type of jig, and for each separated type, only one type of pato mouth shall be provided. It may be arranged to automatically distribute to the separating and locking means having a suitable jig. When a large number of pats are processed, the latter is more advantageous in terms of processing efficiency.
  • the separating and locking jig 3557 is once passed through the slit 21 Just by inserting the new film F2, the old film tail end F1a can be separated and the new film F2 can be locked. Also, it is not necessary to perform the film locking operation separately from the film separating operation, and the operation process can be simplified.

Abstract

A method of reusing a used photographic cassette without disassembling it with a film appearing from a slit opening of the cassette. A method of reusing a photographic cassette and system of reusing the cassette have a type distinguishing step (150) for distinguishing a type of an engagement structure where a film and a spool are engaged, a removal step (450) for removing the film end engaged with the spool, where the removal is carried out by inserting a jig in accordance with the type of the engagement structure distinguished in the type distinguishing step (150), and an engagement step (550) for engaging the tail end of a new film corresponding to the engagement structure using a jig in accordance with the engagement structure distinguished in the type distinguishing step (150), and a taking-up step (650) for taking up the film engaged with the spool.

Description

PC蘭蘭 44  PC Orchid 44
明細書 使用済み写真用パトローネの検査方法及び Description Inspection method of used photo patrone and
その再使用方法並びに写真用フィルムの製造方法 技術分野  Method of reuse and method of producing photographic film
本発明は、 使用済み写真用パト口一ネの検査方法及びその検査システムに関し、 詳しくは、使用済みの写真用パトローネを分解することなく非破壊で検査する検查 方法及びその検査システムに関する。  The present invention relates to a method for inspecting a used photo cartridge and an inspection system thereof, and more particularly, to a method and an inspection system for non-destructively inspecting a used photo cartridge without disassembling.
さらに、 本発明は写真用フィルムの製造方法に関し、 詳しくは、 スプールを内蔵 すると共に両側がキヤップで遮蔽された状態の写真用パトローネに、写真フィルム を係止して巻き取るようにした写真用フィルムの製造方法に関する。  Further, the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a photographic film, and more particularly, to a photographic film in which a photographic film is locked and wound around a photographic cartridge having a built-in spool and both sides shielded by a cap. And a method for producing the same.
さらに、本発明は、写真用パト口一ネの再使用方法及び写真用パトローネの再使 用システムに関し、 詳しくは、 写真用パト口一ネを全く分解することなく、 該写真 用パト口ーネに係止されているフィルム尾端を取り外し、新たなフィルム尾端を係 止することのできる写真用パトローネの再使用方法及び写真用パトロ一ネの再使 用システムに関する。 景: 技術  Furthermore, the present invention relates to a method for reusing a photo patrol port and a system for reusing a photo patrone. More specifically, the present invention relates to a photo patrol port without disassembling the photo patrol port at all. The present invention relates to a method for reusing a photographic patrone and a system for reusing a photographic patrone that can remove a tail end of a film locked in the photographic cartridge and lock a new tail end of the film. Landscape: technology
従来、 ラボで写真フィルムが現像された使用済みの写真用パトローネは、 ゴミと して回収されてそのまま熱源の燃料として処理されるか、粉碎されて金属、樹脂別 に分別された後にそれぞれ資源として再利用に供されるか、産業廃棄物として埋め 立てられてきたが、近年、使用済みの写真用パトローネの再利用は環境保全の観点 力、ら注目され始め、 より高次のリユース (再使用) についても具体的な検討が進ん できており、 市場からも要望されている現状にある。 Conventionally, used photographic patrones whose photographic film has been developed in a lab are either collected as garbage and processed as fuel for heat sources directly, or are ground and separated into metals and resins and then used as resources. They have been recycled or landfilled as industrial waste, but in recent years the reuse of used photographic patrones has been Power, etc. has begun to attract attention, and concrete studies have been made on higher-order reuse (reuse), and there is a demand from the market.
しかしながら、 写真用パトローネのリユースに関しては、 従来、 パトローネ本体 からスプールを取り出した後にそのスプールのみを再利用することが特開 2 0 0 1 - 3 3 7 4 2 4号に開示されているに留まり、スプールを含めた写真用パト口一 ネ全体の再利用に関しては全く考慮されていない。 この従来技術では、写真用パト ローネを解体してスプールのみを再利用するため、スプール以外のパト口一ネ本体 はゴミとなってしまい、 環境適性に配慮されているものではなかった。  However, regarding the reuse of photographic patrones, it has been disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-337374 that only the spool is reused after removing the spool from the patrone body. No consideration is given to the reuse of the entire photographic port, including the spool. In this prior art, since the photo cartridge is disassembled and only the spool is reused, the main body of the cartridge other than the spool becomes garbage and is not considered environmentally friendly.
このため、本出願人は環境適性に最大限配慮し、写真用パトローネを分解するこ となくそのまま再使用することのできる方法及びシステムを特願 2 0 0 2 - 8 2 For this reason, the applicant of the present invention has applied a method and a system in which the photographic patrone can be reused without disassembling it with maximum consideration for environmental suitability.
0 3 0として提案している。 0 3 0 is proposed.
この技術は、使用済みの写真用パト口一ネにおいて、スリット口近傍で切断され てスプールに係止されている写真フィルムの尾端の一部(以下、 これを尾端フィル ムという。) を利用して、 この尾端フィルムをガイドとしてスリット口から薄板状 の治具を揷入し、 この治具によって尾端フィルムをスプ一ルから取り外し、次いで 治具を挿入したまま、今度はこの治具をガイドとして、スリット口から新たな未露 光のフィルムを挿入し、スプールに係止した後、 この未露光のフィルムを巻き込む ものである。  In this technology, a part of the tail end of a photographic film that has been cut near a slit opening and locked to a spool in a used photographic door (hereinafter referred to as a tail end film). Using this tail-end film as a guide, insert a thin plate jig from the slit opening, remove the tail-end film from the spool with this jig, and then insert the jig into this jig. With the tool as a guide, a new unexposed film is inserted from the slit opening, locked on the spool, and then rolled up with the unexposed film.
このように使用済みの写真用パ卜ローネを分解することなくそのまま再使用す る場合、写真用パト口一ネは使用済み品をそのまま利用することになるため、再使 用品とした際の写真用フィルム(写真用パトローネ内に未露光フィルムが巻き込ま れた状態のもの)の品質を維持するためには、再使用に供される写真用パトローネ に未露光のフィルムを巻き込む前に、その写真用パトローネ自体に傷や変形、漏光 等の不具合がないかどう力、即ち、その写真用パト口一ネが再使用に耐えるもので あるか否かを検査する必要がある。 この場合、環境適性に配慮して写真用パトロー ネを分解することなくそのまま再使用するためには、この検査も写真用パトローネ を分解することなく、外部から内部まで写真用パトロ一ネ全体を非破壊で検査する ことが要求される。 If the used photo cartridge is reused without disassembly without disassembly, the photo cartridge will use the used product as it is. In order to maintain the quality of the unexposed film (with the unexposed film entangled in the photographic cartridge), the unexposed film must be wrapped in the photographic cartridge before reuse. The patrone itself is scratched, deformed, and leaked light It is necessary to inspect whether there is any defect such as the power, that is, whether the photo door is reusable. In this case, in order to re-use the photographic patrone without disassembling it in consideration of environmental suitability, this inspection also requires the entire photographic patrone from outside to inside without disassembling the photographic patrone. Inspection by destruction is required.
そこで、 本発明の第 1の目的は、環境適性を最大限配慮し、 写真用パトローネを 分解することなく非破壌で検查することにより、廃棄物を最小限に抑えた循環生産 を実現することのできる写真用パトローネの検査方法及びその検査システムを提 供することにある。  Therefore, the first object of the present invention is to realize recycling production with minimum waste by maximizing environmental suitability and inspecting photographic patrone without decomposing it without decomposing it. An object of the present invention is to provide an inspection method and an inspection system for a photographic patrone that can be used.
また、従来、 3 5 mm等の写真フィルムがパトローネ内に巻回されて収容されて なる写真用フィルムの製造は、 一般に、 鋼板を打抜き、 曲げ加工し、 テレンプを貼 つた舟形を丸めると共に、その片側にのみキャップを嵌めた状態のパトローネを形 成しておき、 このパト口一ネ内にフィルムスクロール(スプールにフィルムを巻き 付けたもの) を収容し、 その後、 パト口一ネのもう片側にキャップを嵌めることに より行っていた。  Conventionally, the production of photographic film, in which a photographic film of 35 mm or the like is wound and housed in a patrone, is generally performed by stamping and bending steel plates, rolling a boat with telemps, and rolling the steel plate. A patrone with a cap fitted on only one side is formed, and a film scroll (a film wrapped around a spool) is accommodated in this pat opening, and then the other side of the pat opening is placed. This was done by fitting a cap.
しかし、 この場合、 片側のみにキャップを嵌めた状態のパトローネは、 キャップ が嵌められていないもう片側が鋼板の弾性により拡開しょうとするため、鋼板の硬 度等の特性パラツキにより形状パラツキが大きくなり、フィルムを巻き込む際やこ のような片キヤップ状態のパトローネを扱う際、パト口一ネの位置決め不良やチヤ ック不良等のトラブルの発生が多かった。  However, in this case, the patrone in which the cap is fitted on only one side tends to expand due to the elasticity of the steel plate on the other side where the cap is not fitted, so the shape variation is large due to the characteristic variations such as the hardness of the steel plate. In many cases, when a film was rolled in or when handling such a patrone in a single-cap state, there were many problems such as poor positioning of the mouth of the pat and the wrong check.
かかる問題点を解消する技術として、予めスプールが内蔵され両側がキャップで 遮蔽された形状が安定したパトローネに、フィルムを係止して巻き込む方法がある。 例えば、特開昭 4 9 - 1 0 7 7 3 2号には、スプールを内蔵して両側にキャップを 嵌めた状態のパトローネのスリットロより、予め先端が湾曲するように加工された 高い弾性係数を持つ板ばねを挿入することで、スリット口を通過した板ばねの先端 を、 その弾性により湾曲状に撓ませてスプール方向に向かわせ、 次いで、 この板ば ねの内側に沿ってスリットロよりフィルムを挿入することで、フィルムをスプール に係止させ、その後、板ばねをスリット口から取り外してフィルムを卷き取る方法 が開示されている。 As a technique for solving such a problem, there is a method in which a film is locked and wound around a patrone having a built-in spool and a stable shape covered on both sides with caps. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 49-107732 discloses a spool built in and caps on both sides. By inserting a leaf spring with a high elastic coefficient that has been processed so that the tip is curved in advance from the slit slot of the patrone in the fitted state, the tip of the leaf spring that has passed through the slit is bent into a curved shape by its elasticity. Then, the film is inserted into the slit spring along the inside of the plate spring to lock the film on the spool. After that, the leaf spring is removed from the slit opening and the film is wound. The method of taking is disclosed.
しかし、 この板ばねは、 これを受容している受入導管内からパトローネのスリツ トロに向けて直線状に挿入されるため、予め湾曲状に加工されている先端の湾曲方 向とスリット口への揷入方向とが異なり、板ばねが受入導管を出てパトローネの直 線状のスリットロを通過する際に、板ばねの先端が弾性により湾曲しょうとしてス リットロの内面と干渉しながら挿入されていき、これによりスリットロの内面に貼 られているテレンプを摩耗させ、時にはスリットロを変形させたりする問題があつ た。写真用フィルムの製造にとってテレンプの摩耗ゃスリットロの変形はパト口一 ネの遮光性に影響を与える重大な問題である。  However, since this leaf spring is linearly inserted into the cartridge of the cartridge from the receiving conduit that receives the leaf spring, the tip of the leaf spring, which has been preliminarily formed into a curved shape, and the slit opening are formed.揷 When the leaf spring exits the receiving conduit and passes through the linear slit slot of the patrone, the tip of the leaf spring is inserted into the slot while interfering with the inner surface of the slit slot as an elastic curve. As a result, there was a problem that the telem attached to the inner surface of the slitlot was worn, and sometimes the slitlot was deformed. For the production of photographic films, the abrasion of telempe ゃ the deformation of slit slits is a serious problem that affects the light-shielding properties of the gate opening.
しかも、板ばねは高い弾性係数を持つ部材により先端が湾曲状に加工形成される ため、形状が安定せず、 先端が目標の位置、 即ちスプールのフィルム係止部に達し ない場合があり、 フィルム係止の確実性が落ちるという問題もあった。  In addition, the leaf spring is formed into a curved shape at the tip by a member having a high elastic modulus, so the shape is not stable, and the tip may not reach the target position, that is, the film locking portion of the spool. There was also a problem that the reliability of the locking was reduced.
そこで、 本発明の第 2の目的は、 上述の問題点を解消し、 スプールを内蔵し、 両 側がキヤップで遮蔽された形状の安定した写真用パト口一ネに対して、パトローネ 外からフィルムを係止して巻き取ることができ、 しかも、パトローネのスリット口 やテレンプに対してダメージを与えることなくフィルム係止を行うことのできる 写真用フィルムの製造方法を提供することにある。  Accordingly, a second object of the present invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems, to provide a built-in spool, and to apply a film from the outside of the cartridge to a stable photographic cartridge with both sides shielded by a cap. It is an object of the present invention to provide a method of manufacturing a photographic film that can be locked and wound and that can be locked without damaging a patrone's slit opening or telemp.
さらに、 従来、 使用済みの 1 3 5型の写真用パトローネ (以下、 本明細書では単 T JP03/07144 In addition, conventionally used 135 type photographic patrones (hereinafter simply referred to as T JP03 / 07144
にパトローネという場合がある。) の利用方法として、 キャップを容易に外せる嵌 合式パトローネを使用して、長尺フィルムをはさみ等で切断し、接着テープでスプ 一ルに係止し、 フィルムをスプールに巻いた後パト口一ネに入れ、キャップを手嵌 めして使用する詰め替え方式がごく一部のユーザーで行われていた。 May be called patrone. As a method of using), use a mating type patrone that can easily remove the cap, cut the long film with scissors, etc., lock the film with adhesive tape, wrap the film around the spool, and then open the Only a small number of users have used a refill method that puts the cap into the bag and fits the cap by hand.
しかし、 近年、 パト口一ネはより遮光性を高める目的で、 キャップを外すのが困 難なキャップかしめ式が大部分となり、またフィルムとスプールとの係止も接着テ ープを使用しない方式が主流となってきている。そのため、 フィルムをスプールに 巻き込んで詰め替えを行うことが困難となり、ラボで現像されたパトローネは再び 使用されることがほとんどなく、そのままゴミとして廃棄されており、環境問題を 引き起こしている。  However, in recent years, most of the pat mouths have a cap-clamping type that makes it difficult to remove the cap in order to further enhance the light-shielding properties, and a method that does not use an adhesive tape to lock the film and the spool. Is becoming mainstream. For this reason, it is difficult to rewind the film by winding it on a spool, and the patrone developed in the lab is rarely used again and is discarded as it is, causing environmental problems.
また、パトローネを解体してスプールのみを分離し、 このスプールを粉砕した後 ペレツト化して再利用する方法も一部で行われているが、スプール以外のパト口一 ネ本体がゴミとなることに変わりはなく、これらが多量に廃棄される問題の解決と はなっていない。  There is also a method in which the patrone is disassembled to separate only the spool, and this spool is crushed, then pelletized, and reused.However, the main part of the pat mouth other than the spool becomes garbage. There is no change, and they do not solve the problem of waste in large quantities.
更に、特開 2 0 0 1— 3 3 7 4 2 4号では、パト口一ネを解体してそこからスプ ールを取り出し、 このスプールのみを再利用する方法が提案されているが、 これも スプール以外のパト口一ネ本体はゴミとなってしまう。  Furthermore, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-337374 proposes a method of disassembling a pat mouth, taking out a spool therefrom, and reusing only this spool. Even the body of the pachinko mouth other than the spool becomes garbage.
このため、パトローネを分解することなくそのまま再使用することのできる方法 及びシステムの確立が望まれている。  Therefore, it is desired to establish a method and a system that can re-use patrone without decomposing it.
一方、 フィルム尾端とスプールとは、一般にフィルム尾端側に形成された係合穴 とスプールのスリット内に形成された係止爪とが互いに係合することにより係止 されるようになつている。 このため、 スプールから旧フィルムを取り外し、 更に未 露光の新フィルムをスプールに取り付けるためには、両者を容易に係合解除又は係 止させることが望まれる。 On the other hand, the film tail end and the spool are generally locked by engaging an engagement hole formed on the film tail end side with a locking claw formed in a slit of the spool. I have. For this reason, in order to remove the old film from the spool and attach the unexposed new film to the spool, the two can be easily disengaged or engaged. It is desired to stop.
スプールへのフィルム尾端の係止方法に着目すると、従来、特開昭 4 9一 1 0 7 7 3 2号に、湾曲した板バネをパト口一ネスリット口より挿入し、 これをガイドに してフィルムを揷入しスプールへ係止する方法が開示されている。 しかし、板パネ が湾曲しているため、パト口一ネのスリット口、特に該スリットロに遮光性を持た せるために設けられているテレンプを傷め易い欠点がある。  Focusing on the method of locking the film tail end to the spool, conventionally, a curved leaf spring was inserted from the pat opening and the slit opening in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 497-10732, and this was used as a guide. A method for inserting a film and locking the film to a spool is disclosed. However, since the panel panel is curved, there is a drawback that the slits in the gate opening, particularly the telem provided to make the slit holes light-shielding, are easily damaged.
また、特開昭 5 1 - 1 3 6 4 2 4号には、 一端がスプールに接続され、 もう一端 がパトローネのスリット口より露出した帯片(リーダ) に、 フィルム先端を接合し た後、 フィルムをスプールに巻き込む方法が開示されている。 しかし、 リーダとフ イルムを接合すると、厚みの違いや突き合わせのズレ等により接合部に段差が発生 し易く、 その外側にフィルムを巻き付けると段差が転写してフィルムに筋が入り、 最悪の場合は力ブリが発生する問題がある。  Also, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-136642 discloses that after joining the leading end of a film to a strip (leader) having one end connected to a spool and the other end exposed from a patrone slit opening, A method of winding a film on a spool is disclosed. However, when the leader and the film are joined, a step is likely to occur at the joint due to a difference in thickness or misalignment of the butt, etc.When the film is wound around the outside, the step is transferred and streaks are formed in the film. In the worst case, There is a problem that force filing occurs.
更に、 特開昭 5 2 - 7 7 7 2 3号には、 スプールに可撓性案内帯片 (リーダ) を 付け、その一方がパトローネ外部に出た状態のパト口一ネに、 リーダに沿ってフィ ルムを挿入してスプールに係止させ、リーダと共にフィルムに巻き込む方法が開示 されている。 しかし、 フィルムをリーダと共に巻き込んでいるため、 フィルムを繰 り出す際に、パトローネのスリット口でリ一ダがジャミングを起こし易い問題があ る。 また、 リーダがスリット口より出た状態で現像処理機にかけた場合、 フィルム の尾端を力ッ夕一で切断する際、 フィルムとリーダを重ねて切断することになり、 カツ夕一の破損や磨耗が発生するおそれもある。  Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 52-77772, a flexible guide strip (leader) is attached to the spool, and one of the spools is attached to the patrol mouth with the one protruding outside the patrone, and is placed along the leader. A method is disclosed in which a film is inserted and locked on a spool, and wound around a film together with a leader. However, since the film is rolled up together with the leader, there is a problem that the leader easily jams at the slit opening of the cartridge when feeding the film. Also, if the leader is put through the processor with the slit coming out of the slit, when the tail end of the film is cut with force, the film and the leader will be overlapped and cut. Wear may also occur.
また、特許第 2 9 6 7 9 6 0号には、 2つの樹脂製ケース部品からなるパトロー ネにおいて、フィルムガイド手段をスプールに一体成形でスプールとの境界部が薄 肉状となるように設け、フィルムガイドの一端がフィルム出入口から突出した状態 で、 フィルムガイド手段に沿ってフィルムをスプールに係止させた後、 フィルムガ イド手段を分離し、 フィルムを巻き込む方法が開示されている。 しかし、 フィルム ガイド手段を分離する (引きちぎる) 際、 粉やゴミが発生し易く、 フィルムに付着 して害を及ぼす問題がある。 Japanese Patent No. 2967790 describes a patrone composed of two resin case parts, in which the film guide means is integrally formed with the spool so that the boundary with the spool becomes thin. , With one end of the film guide protruding from the film entrance A method is disclosed in which after the film is locked on the spool along the film guide means, the film guide means is separated and the film is wound. However, when the film guide means is separated (teared), powder and dust are easily generated, and there is a problem that the film adheres to the film and causes harm.
また、 これらの方法は、 いずれもフィルムの係止に関する技術であり、使用済み のパト口一ネからフィルム尾端を分離する技術には触れられていない。  In addition, none of these methods is related to the locking of the film, and does not mention the technology of separating the tail end of the film from the used pato mouth.
特許第 3 0 3 6 7 1 5号には、 A P Sカートリッジにおいて、金属薄板からなる 円弧状治具でフィルム先端の係止孔を捕捉し、カートリッジスリットロを通して力 Patent No. 3 036 715 discloses that in an APS cartridge, a locking hole at the leading end of a film is captured by an arc-shaped jig made of a thin metal plate, and force is applied through a cartridge slit slot.
—トリッジと干渉しないようにスプールスリッ卜部へ挿入し、フィルムを係止する 方法と、金属薄板からなる円弧状治具をカートリッジのスリットロを通してカート リッジと干渉しないようにスプールのスリット部まで挿入し、フィルムを係止爪か ら浮かしてフィルムを外す方法とが開示されている。 —Insert the film into the spool slit so that it does not interfere with the cartridge, and lock the film.Insert a jig made of a thin metal plate through the slit slot of the cartridge up to the spool so that it does not interfere with the cartridge. A method is disclosed in which the film is lifted from the locking claws to remove the film.
しかし、円弧状治具が力一トリッジのスリット部と干渉しないように形状を設計 したカートリッジ (A P S ) には使用可能だが、 1 3 5パトローネの場合は金属薄 板からなる円弧状治具がパトロ一ネのスリット部と干渉してしまレ 変形させてし まうため使用できない。また、係止用治具の先端はフィルムの係止孔をスプールの 係止爪に引っ掛けるために、 フィルムの係止孔部分を逃げている必要がある一方、 尾端外し用治具は係止爪からフィルムを浮かせるためにスプール係止爪部分に対 応する部分が必要になる。そのため両治具は同一とはならず別物になるため、工程 が分かれてしまいコスト高となる問題がある。  However, it can be used for cartridges (APS) whose shape is designed so that the arc-shaped jig does not interfere with the slits of the force cartridge. However, in the case of the 135 cartridge, an arc-shaped jig made of a thin metal plate It cannot be used because it interferes with the slit part of one and deforms it. Also, the tip of the locking jig must escape the locking hole of the film in order to hook the locking hole of the film with the locking claw of the spool, while the jig for removing the tail end is locked. In order to lift the film from the pawl, a part corresponding to the spool pawl is required. For this reason, the two jigs are not the same but are separate products, so that there is a problem that the process is divided and the cost is increased.
そこで、 本発明の第 3の目的は、 従来、 ゴミとなっていた使用済みのパト口一ネ を分解することなくそのまま再使用し、ゴミを大幅に削減することのできる写真用 パト口一ネの再使用方法及び再使用システムを提供することにある。 PC謂画 44 Accordingly, a third object of the present invention is to provide a photo pat mouth which can greatly reduce trash by reusing a used pat mouth which has been conventionally garbage without disassembling it. And a reuse system. PC so-called picture 44
発明の開示 Disclosure of the invention
上記の目的は、 以下の構成のいづれかひとつによって達成される。  The above object is achieved by one of the following constitutions.
1 .フィルムがパトロ一ネのスリット口から出ている使用済みパトロ一ネを分 解せずに再使用する写真用パトローネの再使用方法であって、  1. A method of reusing a photographic patrone for reusing a used patrone without disassembling a used patrone where a film comes out of a slit opening of the patrone,
フィルムとスプールとの係止構造の種類を判別する種類判別工程と、  A type determining step of determining the type of the locking structure between the film and the spool,
前記種類判別工程において判別された係止構造の種類に応じた治具をパト口一 ネのスリット口から挿入し、スプールに係止されているフィルム尾端を取り外す分 離工程と、  A separation step of inserting a jig according to the type of the locking structure determined in the type determination step from the slit opening of the patrol opening and removing the film tail locked on the spool;
前記種類判別工程において判別された係止構造の種類に応じた治具を用いて、該 係止構造に対応した新たなフィルム尾端をスプールに係止する係止工程と、 前記スプールに係止されたフィルムを巻き取る巻取り工程と、  A locking step of locking a new tail end of the film corresponding to the locking structure to the spool using a jig corresponding to the type of the locking structure determined in the type determination step; and locking the spool to the spool. A winding step of winding the film,
を有することを特徴とする写真用パト口一ネの再使用方法。 A method for reusing a photographic port for a photograph, comprising:
2 .フィルムがパトローネのスリツトロから出ている使用済みパト口一ネを分 解せずに再使用する写真用パトローネの再使用システムであって、  2. A photographic patrone reuse system for reusing a used patrick's mouth without disassembling a film coming out of a squirt in the patrone,
フィルムとスプールとの係止構造の種類を判別する種類判別手段と、  Type determining means for determining the type of the locking structure between the film and the spool;
前記種類判別手段において判別された係止構造の種類に応じた治具をパト口一 ネのスリットロから揷入し、 スプールに係止されているフィルム尾端を取り外す 分離手段と、  A jig corresponding to the type of the locking structure determined by the type determining means is inserted from a slit slot of the patrol opening, and a film tail locked on the spool is removed.
前記種類判別手段において判別された係止構造の種類に応じた治具を用いて、該 係止構造に対応した新たなフィルム尾端をスプールに係止する係止手段と、 前記スプールに係止されたフィルムを巻き取る卷取り手段と、  Locking means for locking a new film tail end corresponding to the locking structure to the spool using a jig corresponding to the type of the locking structure determined by the type determining means; locking to the spool Winding means for winding the film thus obtained,
を有することを特徴とする写真用パト口一ネの再使用システム。 3 .写真フィルムを揷通するスリット口を有し、スプールを内蔵すると共に両 側がキャップで遮蔽されてなる使用済みの写真用パトローネを分解せずに検査す る写真用パト口一ネの検査方法であって、 A reusing system for a photo pat mouth. 3.Inspection method for photographic patricks, which has a slit for penetrating photographic film, has a built-in spool, and has both sides shielded by caps. And
上記写真用パトローネの内部を検査する内部検査工程を有することを特徴とす る使用済み写真用パトローネの検査方法。  A method for inspecting a used photographic patrone, comprising an internal inspection step of inspecting the inside of the photographic patrone.
4.写真フィルムを揷通するスリット口を有し、スプールを内蔵すると共に両 側がキヤップで遮蔽されてなる使用済みの写真用パトローネを分解せずに検査す る写真用パトローネの検査システムであって、  4. A photographic patrone inspection system that has a slit opening through which photographic film passes, has a built-in spool, and inspects a used photographic patrone without disassembling both sides of which are shielded by caps. ,
上記写真用パトローネの内部を検査する内部検査手段を有することを特徴とす る使用済み写真用パトロ一ネの検查システム。  An inspection system for a used photographic cartridge, comprising an internal inspection means for inspecting the inside of the photographic cartridge.
5 .写真フィルムを装填するスリット口を有し、スプールを内蔵すると共に両 側がキャップで遮蔽されてなる写真用パトローネに写真フィルムを装填して写真 用フィルムを製造する方法であつて、  5. A method of manufacturing a photographic film by loading a photographic film into a photographic patrone having a slit opening for loading a photographic film, incorporating a spool, and having both sides shielded by caps,
前記スリット口に、平板状の先端ガイド部に平板状の後端ガイド部を所定の角度 で傾斜状に接続してなるガイド部材を、前記先端ガイド部がパトロ一ネ本体に対す るスリット口の延出方向と平行な状態で、且つ前記後端ガイド部がスリットロに対 してパトローネ本体側に位置した状態で、前記先端ガイド部側から直進状に挿入す る工程と、  A guide member, which is formed by connecting a flat rear guide portion to a flat front guide portion at a predetermined angle and inclined at a predetermined angle, is provided in the slit opening. Inserting in a straight line from the front end guide section in a state parallel to the extending direction and in a state where the rear end guide section is positioned on the patrone main body side with respect to the slit slot;
前記スリットロに挿入された前記ガイド部材を傾斜側に向けて回転させてその 先端ガイド部の先端を前記スプールへ向けると共に、前記ガイド部材の後端ガイド 部の一部が前記スリットロに挿入されるまで更に挿入して、前記先端ガイド部の先 端をスプールに接近させる工程と、  The guide member inserted into the slit roller is rotated toward the inclined side so that the distal end of the tip guide portion is directed to the spool, and a part of the rear end guide portion of the guide member is inserted into the slit roller. Further inserting the distal end guide portion so that the distal end of the distal end guide portion approaches the spool;
前記ガイド部材の傾斜面側に接触させつつ写真フィルムを前記スリツトロから 挿入し、 該フィルムの先端を前記スプールに係止させる工程と、 The photographic film is removed from the slittro while contacting the inclined surface side of the guide member. Inserting, and locking the leading end of the film to the spool;
前記スリットロに挿入されず外部に存在している前記後端ガイド部を引き出す と共に傾斜側に向けて回転させた後、先端ガイド部を直進状に引き出して該ガイド 部材を前記写真用パトローネ外へ取り出す工程と、  After pulling out the rear end guide portion which is not inserted in the slit slot and is present outside and rotates it toward the inclined side, the front end guide portion is pulled out in a straight line and the guide member is taken out of the photo cartridge. Process and
前記スプールに係止した写真フィルムを巻き取る工程と、  Winding the photographic film locked on the spool,
を有することを特徴とする写真用フィルムの製造方法。 A method for producing a photographic film, comprising:
以上説明した検査方法及び検査システムによれば、全て非破壌でパトローネ 1の 外部から内部までの検査を行うことで、その再使用の適否を検査することができる ため、環境適性を最大限の配慮を払うことができ、廃棄物を最小限に抑えた循環生 産を実現することが可能である。  According to the inspection method and the inspection system described above, it is possible to inspect the suitability of reuse of the patrone 1 by performing the inspection from the outside to the inside of the patrone 1 in a non-crushed state. Care can be taken, and it is possible to achieve recycling that minimizes waste.
本発明によれば、 従来の問題点を解消し、 スプールを内蔵し、 両側がキャップで 遮蔽された形状の安定した写真用パトローネに対して、パトローネ外からフィルム を係止して巻き取ることができ、 しかも、パトローネのスリット口やテレンプに対 してダメージを与えることなくフィルム係止を行うことのできる写真用フィルム の製造方法を提供することができる。  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the conventional problem is solved and a spool is built in and it can lock | wind a film from the outside of a patrone to a stable photographic patrone of the shape where both sides were covered with a cap. Further, it is possible to provide a method of manufacturing a photographic film capable of locking a film without damaging a patrone's slit opening or telemump.
従来、再使用されずゴミとなっていたパトローネを分解することなくそのまま再 使用し、ゴミを大幅に削減することのできる写真用パトローネの再使用方法及び再 使用システムを提供することができる。  It is possible to provide a method and a system for reusing a photographic patrone that can recycle a patrone that has not been reused and has become garbage as it is without decomposing it, thereby greatly reducing garbage.
また、 ラボで現像した後のパトローネのみならず、写真フィルム製造工程でロス となつて廃棄されていたパトローネゃ、市場で期限切れ等により廃棄されていたパ トローネについてもそのまま再使用が可能になる。これらにより廃棄物のより一層 の減少が可能になる。 0307144 In addition, it is possible to reuse not only patrone after development in the lab, but also patrone II discarded as a loss in the photographic film manufacturing process, and patrone discarded due to expiration in the market. These will enable further reduction of waste. 0307144
11 図面の簡単な説明  11 Brief description of the drawings
第 1 (a) 図は、 パトローネの内部構成を示す断面図、 第 1 (b) 図は、 第 1 (a) 図の I方向から見た側面図;  Fig. 1 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the internal configuration of the patrone, Fig. 1 (b) is a side view of Fig. 1 (a) viewed from the direction I;
第 2図は、 第 1 (b) 図の I I方向から見たパトローネの側面図;  Fig. 2 is a side view of the patrone seen from the I-I direction in Fig. 1 (b);
第 3図は、 使用済みパト口一ネの斜視図;  FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a used pato mouth;
第 4図は、本発明に係る使用済み写真用パトローネの検査方法の流れを示すェ 程ブロック図;  FIG. 4 is a process block diagram showing the flow of the method for inspecting a used photo patrone according to the present invention;
第 5図は、本発明に係る使用済み写真用パトローネの検査システムの概略構成 第 6図は、 回転方向位置決め手段 (バケツト) の一例を示す斜視図; 第 7図は、 フィルム繰出し及び切断工程の一例を示す図;  FIG. 5 is a schematic configuration of a used photographic cartridge inspection system according to the present invention. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing an example of a rotation direction positioning means (bucket); FIG. Figure showing an example;
第 8図は、 フィルム巻出工程の一例を示す概念図;  FIG. 8 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a film unwinding process;
第 9図は、 漏光検査工程の一例を示す概念図;  Fig. 9 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of the light leakage inspection process;
第 10図は、 異物検査工程の一例を示す概念図;  FIG. 10 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a foreign matter inspection process;
第 11図は、 卜レイの構造を示す部分断面図;  Fig. 11 is a partial sectional view showing the structure of the tray;
第 12図は、 保持手段の一例を示す斜視図;  FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing an example of the holding means;
第 13 (a) 図は写真用パトローネの外観構成を示す斜視図、 第 13 (b) 図 はその断面図;  FIG. 13 (a) is a perspective view showing an external configuration of a photographic patrone, and FIG. 13 (b) is a sectional view thereof.
第 14 (a) 図はパトローネ内に収容されるスプールの斜視図、 第 14 (b) 図はスプールの中央断面図;  Fig. 14 (a) is a perspective view of a spool housed in the patrone, Fig. 14 (b) is a central sectional view of the spool;
第 15図は、本発明の第 1の見地に係る写真用フィルムの製造方法を実施する ために好適な製造装置の一例を示す概略斜視図;  FIG. 15 is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a production apparatus suitable for carrying out the method for producing a photographic film according to the first aspect of the present invention;
第 16図は、本発明の第 1の見地に係る写真用フィルムの製造方法に使用され るガイド部材を示す斜視図; FIG. 16 is used in the method for producing a photographic film according to the first aspect of the present invention. Perspective view showing the guide member;
第 17 (a) 図〜第 17 (g) 図は, 本発明の第 1の見地に係る写真用フィル ムの製造方法の工程を説明する図;  FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (g) are diagrams for explaining the steps of the method for manufacturing a photographic film according to the first aspect of the present invention;
第 18 (a) 図は第 2の見地に係る写真用フィルムの製造方法に使用されるガ イド部材を示す斜視図、 第 18 (b) 図はその側面図;  FIG. 18 (a) is a perspective view showing a guide member used in the method of manufacturing a photographic film according to the second aspect, and FIG. 18 (b) is a side view thereof;
第 19図は、第 3の見地に係る写真用フィルムの製造方法に使用されるガイド 部材及びその周辺の構成を示す斜視図;  FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing a guide member used in the method of manufacturing a photographic film according to the third aspect and a configuration around the guide member;
第 20 (a) 図〜第 20 (e) 図は, 第 3の見地に係る写真用フィルムの製造 方法の工程を説明する図;  Figures 20 (a) to 20 (e) are diagrams illustrating the steps of a method for manufacturing a photographic film according to the third aspect;
第 21図は、 第 3の見地に係るガイド部材の他の実施形態を示す斜視図; 第 22図は、 135型の写真用パトローネの外観構成を示す斜視図; 第 23 (a)図はパトローネ内に収容されているスプールの斜視図、第 23 (b) 図はスプールの中央断面図;  FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing another embodiment of the guide member according to the third aspect; FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing the external configuration of a 135-type photographic patrone; FIG. 23 (a) is a patrone Perspective view of the spool housed therein, FIG. 23 (b) is a central sectional view of the spool;
第 24 (a) 図、 第 24 (b) 図はスプールとフィルムとの係止構造を説明す る図;  Fig. 24 (a) and Fig. 24 (b) are diagrams illustrating the locking structure between the spool and the film;
第 25図は、 フィルム尾端の係止状態を示す図;  Figure 25 is a diagram showing the locked state of the film tail end;
第 26図は、 再使用方法の工程プロック図;  Figure 26 is a process block diagram of the reuse method;
第 27図は、 フィルムの分離及び係止を行うための装置の概略を示す斜視図; 第 28図は、 分離係止用治具の先端の一例を示す平面図;  FIG. 27 is a perspective view schematically showing an apparatus for separating and locking a film; FIG. 28 is a plan view showing an example of a tip of a separation and locking jig;
第 29図は、 フィルムの分離及び係止を行うための装置の作動を説明する図 第 30 (a)図、第 30 (b)図はフィルム尾端を分離する状態を説明する図; 第 31図は、フィルム尾端分離時のフィルム張力と分離係止用治具の挿入量と の関係を示すグラフ; 第 3 2図は、 フィルムの分離及び係止を行うための装置の作動を説明する図; 第 3 3図は、 フィルムの分離及び係止を行うための装置の作動を説明する図; 第 3 4 ( a )図、第 3 4 ( b )図はフィルム尾端を係止する状態を説明する図; 第 3 5図は、パト口一ネ種とスプール構造との関係を記憶させたデータテープ ルの一例を示す図; FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the device for separating and locking the film. FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b) are diagrams for explaining a state in which the tail end of the film is separated; The graph shows the relationship between the film tension and the insertion amount of the separation and locking jig when separating the tail end of the film; FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the device for separating and locking the film; FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the device for separating and locking the film; Fig. 4 (a) and Fig. 34 (b) are diagrams explaining the state of locking the film tail end; Fig. 35 is a data tape that stores the relationship between one type of pawl and the spool structure. Figure showing an example of a file;
第 3 6図は、再使用システムにおける種類判別時における処理フローの一例を 示す図。 発明を実施するための最良の形態  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a processing flow at the time of type determination in a reuse system. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
以下、 本発明の第 1の目的を達成するための実施の形態について説明する。 まず、 写真用パト口一ネ (以下、 単にパトローネという。 ) の構成について説明 する。 第 1 ) 図は、 パト口一ネの内部構成を示す断面図、 第 1 (b ) 図は第 1 ( a ) 図の I方向から見た側面図、 第 2図は第 1 ( b ) 図の I I方向から見たパト ローネの側面図、第 3図は使用済みパトローネの斜視図である。 ここでは最も代表 的な 3 5 mmの写真フィルムを収納する 1 3 5フィルムパト口一ネを示している。 パトローネ 1は、鋼板を用いて円筒状に形成されたパトローネ本体 1 Aにスプー ル 1 Bを内蔵し、その両側にそれぞれキャップ a 1、 a 1をかしめ固定して構成さ れている。各キャップ a 1には中心に開口 a 2が形成されており、スプール 1 Bは その両端にそれぞれ突出している各ハブ b 1、 b 2が上記開口 a 2から外部に突出 して支承されることで、 ノ\°トローネ本体 1 A内において回転可能とされている。 パト口一ネ本体 1 Aは、円筒状に丸められた鋼板の両端の内面同士を間隙をおい て重ね合わせ、該重ね合わせ部を同一方向に折り曲げると共にパト口一ネ本体 1 A の周方向に延出し、その重ね合わせ部に形成される間隙が写真フィルム(図示せず) 画 44 Hereinafter, an embodiment for achieving the first object of the present invention will be described. First, the configuration of the photo patrol door (hereinafter simply referred to as patrone) will be described. Fig. 1) is a cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the gate opening, Fig. 1 (b) is a side view of Fig. 1 (a) viewed from the direction I, and Fig. 2 is Fig. 1 (b). Fig. 3 is a side view of the patrone viewed from the II direction, and Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the used patrone. Here, the most representative 135mm film pocket for storing 35mm photographic film is shown. The patrone 1 is configured such that a spool 1B is built in a patrone body 1A formed into a cylindrical shape using a steel plate, and caps a1 and a1 are caulked and fixed to both sides thereof. An opening a2 is formed at the center of each cap a1, and each hub 1 and b2 of the spool 1B projecting from both ends thereof are supported by projecting from the opening a2 to the outside. Thus, it is rotatable in the nose cone 1A. The gate opening body 1A is formed by overlapping the inner surfaces of both ends of a steel plate rolled into a cylindrical shape with a gap therebetween, bending the overlapped portion in the same direction, and in the circumferential direction of the gate opening 1 body 1A. A photographic film (not shown) that extends and forms a gap in the overlapping portion Picture 44
14 を出し入れする際のスリット口 a 3となり、このスリット口 a 3に遮光性を持たせ るためのテレンプ a 4が設けられている。  14 is a slit opening a3 for taking in and out, and the slit opening a3 is provided with a telemump a4 for providing light shielding.
スプール 1 Bは、写真フィルムを巻き取る巻取り軸 b 2の両端にそれぞれフラン ジ b 3、 b 3が、更にその外側にそれぞれ八ブ b 1、 b 2が同心状に設けられてい る。 各ハブ b 1、 b 2は、 パトローネ本体 1 Aに内蔵された状態で、 パト口一ネ本 体 1 Aから大きく突出する突出側のハブ b 1と、パトローネ本体 1 Aから突出しな い非突出側のハプ b 2とされており、 以下、 本明細書では、 前者の突出側のハブ b 1を長ハブ、 後者の非突出側のハブ b 2を短ハブという。  In the spool 1B, flanges b3 and b3 are provided at both ends of a take-up shaft b2 for winding a photographic film, and eight b1 and b2 are provided concentrically outside thereof. The hubs b 1 and b 2 are built into the patrone main unit 1 A, and the protruding side hub b 1 that protrudes greatly from the pat door main unit 1 A and the non-projecting that does not protrude from the patrone main unit 1 A Hereafter, in the present specification, the former protruding side hub b1 is referred to as a long hub, and the latter non-protruding side hub b2 is referred to as a short hub.
巻取り軸 b 2には、写真フィルムの先端が挿入されるスリット状のスプール孔 b 4が形成され、そのスプール孔 b 4内には係止爪 b 5と該係止爪 b 5に係止された 写真フィルムの抜けを防止するための押えリブ b 6とが対向状に設けられている。 第 1図に示す態様では、係止爪 b 5はスプール孔 b 4内において所定間隔をもつて 2つ設けられ、押えリブ b 6はその間に 1つだけ設けられているが、係止爪 b 5及 び押えリブ b 6の数、 形状については特に限定されない。  A slit-shaped spool hole b4 into which the leading end of the photographic film is inserted is formed in the take-up shaft b2, and a locking claw b5 and a locking claw b5 are locked in the spool hole b4. A holding rib b6 for preventing the photographic film from coming off is provided in an opposed shape. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, two locking claws b5 are provided at predetermined intervals in the spool hole b4, and only one pressing rib b6 is provided therebetween. The number and shape of 5 and the holding rib b 6 are not particularly limited.
ノ°トローネ本体 1 Aの外表面には、第 2図に示すように、パトローネ内に収納さ れる写真フィルムの感度や枚数、メーカー等の品種識別用の D Xパーコード a 5と、 パト口一ネ本体 1 Aの表面に金属地肌が露出した導電部及び塗装された絶縁部が 市松状に設けられ、その配列パ夕一ンによって内部に収納されている写真フィルム の感度や枚数等の品種識別情報が記録される C A Sコード a 6とが設けられてい る。  As shown in Fig. 2, the DX Percode a5 for identifying the type and sensitivity of photographic film stored in the patrone, the type of manufacturer, etc. Conductive part with exposed metal background and painted insulating part are provided in a checkered pattern on the surface of the main body 1A, and the type of photographic film, such as sensitivity and number of photographic films, stored inside is arranged by the arrangement pattern. A CAS code a6 for recording information is provided.
また、 同図に示すパト口一ネ 1は、上記 D Xバ一コード a 5及び C A Sコード a 6とは別に、コニカ社製パトローネに特有の品種特定用バーコード a 7が設けられ ている。 44 In addition, the patrol mouth 1 shown in the figure is provided with a bar code a7 for product identification that is unique to the Konica Patrone, in addition to the DX bar code a5 and the CAS code a6. 44
15 使用済みのパト口一ネ 1は、第 3図に示すように、写真フィルムがスプールに係 止されている状態でスリット口 a 3の近傍で切り落とされ、その尾端フィルム Fの 一部がスリット口 a 3から出ている状態にある。本発明では、 このような使用済み パトローネ 1に新たな未露光のフィルムを装填して再使用に供するに際し、その使 用済みのパト口一ネの検査を行う。  15 As shown in Fig. 3, the used pawl 1 is cut off near slit a3 with the photographic film locked on the spool, and a part of the tail end film F is cut off. It is in a state of protruding from slit opening a3. In the present invention, when a new unexposed film is loaded into such used patrone 1 and reused, the used patrone 1 is inspected.
次に、 本発明に係る検査方法及び検査システムについて説明する。第 4図は、 本 発明に係る検査方法の流れを示す工程プロック図、第 5図は検査システムの概略構 成図である。  Next, an inspection method and an inspection system according to the present invention will be described. FIG. 4 is a process block diagram showing a flow of an inspection method according to the present invention, and FIG. 5 is a schematic configuration diagram of an inspection system.
本発明において検査工程は、第 4図に示すように、 整列位置決め工程 1 0 0、 分 別工程 2 0 0、外観検査工程 3 0 0、 内部検査工程 4 0 0及び回収工程 5 0 0を有 して構成されている。なお、外観検査工程 3 0 0と内部検查工程 4 0 0の順序は特 に問わない。 以下、 第 1 ( a ) 図〜第 3図に示すパトローネの構成及び第 5図に示 す検查システムの概略構成図を参照しつつ各検査工程の詳細について説明する。  In the present invention, as shown in FIG. 4, the inspection step includes an alignment and positioning step 100, a sorting step 200, an appearance inspection step 300, an internal inspection step 400, and a recovery step 500. It is configured. The order of the appearance inspection step 300 and the internal inspection step 400 is not particularly limited. Hereinafter, the details of each inspection process will be described with reference to the configuration of the patrone shown in FIGS. 1 (a) to 3 and the schematic configuration diagram of the inspection system shown in FIG.
( 1 ) 整列位置決め工程  (1) Alignment positioning process
ラボから回収された使用済みのパトローネ 1は、ホッパー等の容器 1 0に収納さ れた状態で本検査工程に搬送される。整列位置決め工程 1 0 0では、検査に先立ち、 各パトローネ 1を検査し易いように、パトローネ 1をそのスプール 1 Bの軸方向に 整列させると共に、各パトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3が全て同一位置となるように 位置決めを行う。  The used patrone 1 collected from the laboratory is transported to the main inspection step in a state of being stored in a container 10 such as a hopper. In the alignment and positioning process 100, prior to the inspection, the cartridges 1 are aligned in the axial direction of their spools 1B so that each cartridge 1 can be easily inspected, and the slits a3 of each cartridge 1 are all in the same position. Perform positioning so that
本実施形態に示す整列位置決め工程 1 0 0は、軸方向整列搬送工程 1 0 1及び回 転方向位置決め工程 1 0 2を含み、 まず軸方向整列搬送工程 1 0 1において、 図示 しないパーツフィーダ等の適宜の整列供給装置を用いて、パト口一ネ 1におけるス プール 1 Bの軸方向の整列を行う。整列されたパトローネ 1は、次いで回転方向位 置決め工程 1 0 2において、第 6図に示すように、それぞれ個別にバケツ卜 2 0内 に収容される。バケツト 2 0は搬送コンベア B C上に複数取り付けられており、 ス リット口 a 3を除くパトロ一ネ 1の大部分を収容するように構成され、パトローネ 1をバケツト 2 0内においてそのスプール 1 Bの軸を中心に回転させることで、ス リット口 a 3がバケット 2 0の上縁部 2 0 aに当接して該スリット口 a 3の向き がその位置で固定され、パトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3が全て同一側に向くように 位置決めされる。 これにより位置決めされた各パトローネ 1は、バケツト 2 0に収 容された状態で搬送コンベア B Cの駆動により次工程へ搬送される。 The alignment and positioning step 100 shown in the present embodiment includes an axial alignment and transport step 101 and a rotational direction positioning step 102. First, in the axial alignment and transport step 101, a part feeder (not shown) The spool 1B is aligned in the axial direction at the patrol port 1 using an appropriate alignment supply device. The aligned patrone 1 is then rotated In the placement step 102, as shown in FIG. 6, they are individually stored in buckets 20, respectively. A plurality of buckets 20 are mounted on the conveyor BC and are configured to accommodate most of the cartridge 1 except for the slit port a3, and the cartridge 1 is attached to the spool 1B in the bucket 20. By rotating about the axis, the slit port a 3 comes into contact with the upper edge 20 a of the bucket 20, and the direction of the slit port a 3 is fixed at that position, and the slit port a 3 of the patrone 1 is fixed. Are positioned so that they all face the same side. Each of the cartridges 1 positioned in this manner is transported to the next step by driving the transport conveyor BC while being stored in the bucket 20.
( 2 ) 分別工程  (2) Sorting process
整列位置決め工程 1 0 0において整列及び位置決めされたパトローネ 1は、分別 工程 2 0 0に送られ、 検査に先立って、 ここで適合品と非適合品とに分別される。 ここでの適合品、非適合品の分別は、例えばそのパト口一ネ 1が他社製品である場 合等、パトローネを後段の検査項目を実行する前に予め篩い分けしておくものであ り、これはパ卜口一ネ 1の表面に設けられた D Xバーコ一ド a 5を読み取ることに より行うことができる。  The patrone 1 aligned and positioned in the alignment and positioning step 100 is sent to a separation step 200, where it is separated into a conforming product and a non-conforming product prior to inspection. The classification of conforming products and non-conforming products here means that the patrone is sieved in advance before executing the subsequent inspection items, for example, when the patrol port 1 is a product of another company. This can be performed by reading the DX bar code a5 provided on the surface of the tablet 1.
D Xバーコ一ド a 5は規格化された各社共通の情報コードであり、第 6図に示す ように、バケツト 2 0に形成された読み取り窓 2 1力、ら、該バケツト 2 0に収容さ れたパトローネ 1表面の D Xバーコード a 5が外部に露呈するようになっている。 この D Xバーコードをバーコードリーダー 3 0を用いて読み取ることで、自社製品 か他社製品か等の品種の識別を自動的に行うことができる。また、パトローネ 1に 収納される写真フィルムの種類、 例えばカラー、 白黒、 セピア、 リバーサル等の判 別を行い、 これによつて適合品と非適合品とを分別するようにしてもよい。 D Xバ 一コード a 5の読み取り不良の場合もこの段階で分別しておくことが好ましい。 この分別工程 2 0 0における搬送経路上には切替ゲート 3 1が設けられており、 上記分別工程 2 0 0を経たパトローネ 1は、図示しないプッシャによってバケツト 2 0内から軸方向に押し出されて切替ゲート 3 1に移送される。ここで上記バーコ 一ドリーダー 3 0によって読み取られた情報に基づいて非適合品とされたパ卜口 ーネは工程外へ排出され、 適合品のみが次工程に移送される。 The DX bar code a5 is a standardized information code common to all companies, and as shown in FIG. 6, the reading window 21 formed in the bucket 20 is stored in the bucket 20. The DX barcode a5 on the patrone 1 surface is exposed to the outside. By reading this DX barcode using a barcode reader 30, it is possible to automatically identify the type of product, such as a product of its own or a product of another company. In addition, the type of photographic film stored in the patrone 1, for example, color, black and white, sepia, reversal, etc., may be determined, and accordingly, a conforming product and a non-conforming product may be separated. It is also preferable to discriminate at this stage even the reading error of the DX code a5. A switching gate 31 is provided on the transport path in the separation step 200, and the patrone 1 that has passed through the separation step 200 is pushed out of the bucket 20 by a pusher (not shown) in the axial direction and switched. Transferred to gate 31. Here, the non-conforming product based on the information read by the barcode reader 30 is discharged out of the process, and only the conforming product is transferred to the next process.
なお、本発明では、パトローネの製造過程において生じた生産ロス品や店頭等に おいて期限切れとなった期限切れ品を回収した際のパト口一ネを再使用する場合、 上記切替ゲート 3 1から本検査工程に合流させることができる。工場や店頭等から 回収された上記生産ロス品や期限切れ品のパトローネ 1 aは、未使用の写真フィル ム F aが収納された状態にあるため、 合流前に切断しておく。 このため、 回収され た生産ロス品や期限切れ品のパトローネ 1 aは、フィルム繰出し及び切断工程 6 0 0においてフィルムの切断が行われるようになつている。  According to the present invention, when reusing a patrol mouth when collecting a production loss product generated in the process of manufacturing a patrone or an expired product expired in a store or the like, the switching gate 31 is used for the re-use. It can be joined to the inspection process. The above-mentioned lost or expired patrone 1a collected from factories and stores is cut off before merging because it contains unused photo film Fa. For this reason, the film cartridges of the recovered production loss products and expired products are cut in the film feeding and cutting step 600.
このフィルム繰出し及び切断工程 6 0 0には、第 7図に示すように、パト口一ネ 1 a内に収納された未使用の写真フィルム F aを挟み付けて繰り出す一対の繰出 しローラ 1 1、 1 1と、繰り出された写真フィルム F aをパトローネ 1 aのスリツ トロ近傍で切断するカツタ 1 2とを有している。回収されたパト口一ネ 1 aは、 こ こで写真フィルム F aが繰出しローラ 1 1、 1 1によって繰り出され、カツタ 1 2 によって切断されることで、 尾端フィルムのみが残存した状態となる。 この後、 こ のパトローネ 1 aは、ラボから回収された上記使用済みのパトローネ 1と同様に検 査を行うため切替ゲート 3 1から合流される。  In the film feeding and cutting step 600, as shown in FIG. 7, a pair of feeding rollers 1 1, which sandwiches and feeds the unused photographic film Fa stored in the patrol opening 1 a, is used. , 11 and a cutter 12 for cutting the fed photographic film Fa near the slittro of the cartridge 1a. At this point, the collected film 1a is fed by the feeding rollers 11 and 11 and the photographic film Fa is fed by the rollers 11 and cut by the cutter 12 so that only the tail end film remains. . Thereafter, the patrone 1a is joined from the switching gate 31 to perform an inspection similarly to the used patrone 1 collected from the laboratory.
なお、以降は、 この切替ゲ一卜 3 1から合流された上記生産ロス品や期限切れ品 のパト口一ネもパトローネ 1という。  In the following, the patrol port of the production loss product or expired product merged from the switching gate 31 is also referred to as “patrone 1”.
( 3 ) 外観検査工程 分別工程 2 0 0をパス.した適合品のパトローネ 1は、次い 外観検査工程 3 0 0 に送られ、 ここでパトローネ 1を分解することなくその外観の検査を行う。本実施 形態に示す外観検査工程 3 0 0は、尾端フィルム有無検査工程 3 0 1、スリット口 変形検查工程 3 0 2、 全高検査工程 3 0 3、外周変形検査工程 3 0 4、 C A Sパタ 一ン検查工程 3 0 5を含んで構成されている。なお、 これら各工程 3 0 1〜3 0 5 の順序は任意である。 (3) Visual inspection process The compliant patrone 1 that passed the separation process 200 is sent to the next appearance inspection process 300, where the patrone 1 is inspected for its appearance without being disassembled. The appearance inspection process 300 shown in the present embodiment includes a tail edge film presence inspection process 301, a slit opening deformation inspection process 302, an overall height inspection process 303, an outer peripheral deformation inspection process 304, and a CAS pattern. It is configured to include a one-step detection step 305. Note that the order of these steps 301 to 305 is arbitrary.
上記各工程 3 0 1〜3 0 5は回転可能に設けられた検査夕一レット 4 0上の所 定の位置にそれぞれ配設されている。 上記分別工程 2 0 0を経たパトロ一ネ 1は、 切替ゲ一ト 3 1から図示しないプッシャによつて軸方向に押し出され、パト口一ネ 1を保持するために検査タ一レツト 4 0に取り付けられた保持手段 8 0に移送さ れる。  Each of the above steps 301 to 305 is arranged at a predetermined position on a rotatable inspection tray 40. After passing through the sorting step 200, the patrol machine 1 is pushed out of the switching gate 31 in the axial direction by a pusher (not shown), and is transferred to the inspection pallet 40 to hold the pawl opening 1. It is transferred to the attached holding means 80.
この保持手段 8 0は、第 1 2図に示すように、検査ターレット 4 0表面に取り付 けられており、パトローネ 1を収容する収容部 8 1と、該収容部 8 1に対して軸部 8 2を中心に開閉可能に設けられた開閉部 8 3とを有している。パト口一ネ 1は開 放された上記開閉部 8 3から収容部 8 1内に、スリット口 a 3を上記軸部 8 2とは 反対側に向けた状態で収容され、その後開閉部 8 3が閉じられることで、上記スリ ッ卜ロ a 3が収容部 8 1の縁部と開閉部 8 3の縁部とで挟まれた状態で保持手段 8 0から外部に露出した状態とされている。パトローネ 1は、 この保持手段 8 0に 保持されて検查タ一レット 4 0の回転により上記各工程間を搬送される。  As shown in FIG. 12, the holding means 80 is attached to the surface of the inspection turret 40, and has a housing 81 for housing the patrone 1 and a shaft with respect to the housing 81. And an opening / closing section 83 provided so as to be openable / closable centered at 82. The opening 1 is housed in the housing 81 from the opened opening / closing section 83 with the slit a3 facing the opposite side to the shaft section 82, and then the opening / closing section 83 Is closed, so that the slit slot a 3 is exposed to the outside from the holding means 80 while being sandwiched between the edge of the housing portion 81 and the edge of the opening / closing portion 83. . The patrone 1 is held by the holding means 80 and conveyed between the above-described steps by the rotation of the detection turret 40.
切替ゲート 3 1から上記保持手段 8 0に移送されたパトローネ 1は、検查ターレ ット 4 0が時計回りに回転することで、最初の尾端フィルム有無検査工程 3 0 1に 达 れる。  The patrone 1 transferred from the switching gate 31 to the holding means 80 is subjected to the first trailing edge film presence / absence inspection step 301 by rotating the detection turret 40 clockwise.
尾端フィルム有無検査工程 3 0 1では、尾端フィルム Fの有無の検査を行う。前 4 In the tail end film presence inspection step 301, the presence or absence of the tail end film F is inspected. Previous Four
19 述したように、尾端フィルム Fを利用して未露光フィルムをパトローネ 1のスプー ル 1 Bに係止する場合には、 この尾端フィルム Fが必要なためである。 この尾端フ イルム Fは、第 3図に示すように、パトローネ 1のスリットロ a 3近傍において切 断されているため、本検査工程まで搬送されてくる過程でパト口一ネ 1内に巻き込 まれてしまっている場合がある。 このため、尾端フィルム Fの有無を検査するに先 立ち、スプール 1 Bをフィルムの巻き出し方向に若干回転させ、尾端フィルム Fを スリット口 a 3からパトローネ 1の外に出しきるようにしておく。従って、尾端フ イルム有無検査工程 3 0 1の上流工程において又は少なくとも尾端フィルム有無 検査工程 3 0 1において尾端フィルム Fの有無の検査を行う前までに、第 5図に示 すように、スプール 1 Bを回転させて尾端フィルム Fをスリットロ a 3から外に出 すフィルム巻出し工程 3 0 1 aを有しておくことが好ましい。  19 As described above, when the unexposed film is to be locked to the spool 1B of the patrone 1 using the tail end film F, the tail end film F is necessary. As shown in Fig. 3, the tail end film F is cut off near the slit slot a3 of the patrone 1, so that the tail end film F is entangled in the pat slot 1 in the process of being transported to the main inspection step. It may be rare. Therefore, before inspecting the presence or absence of the tail end film F, slightly rotate the spool 1B in the film unwinding direction so that the tail end film F can be taken out of the cartridge 1 from the slit opening a3. deep. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 5, before the inspection of the presence or absence of the tail end film F in the upstream process of the tail end film presence inspection process 301 or at least before the inspection of the tail end film F It is preferable to have a film unwinding step 301a in which the spool 1B is rotated to take out the tail end film F from the slit slot a3.
このフィルム巻出し工程 3 0 1 aでは、第 8図に示すように、スプール 1 Bの短 ハブ b 2側に挿入してスプール 1 Bを回動させる回動軸 4 1を有するスプール回 動手段を有し、このスプール回動手段によって回動軸 4 1をスプール 1 Bを尾端フ イルム Fの巻き出し方向に回動させることで、尾端フィルム Fをスリッ卜ロ a 3か ら外に出しきる。 このときのスプール 1 Bの回し過ぎを防止するため、回動軸 4 1 の回動時のトルクを検出するトルク計又はトルクリミッタ等のトルク検出手段 4 2が設けられており、 所定のトルクで回動を停止するようになっている。  In the film unwinding step 301a, as shown in FIG. 8, a spool rotating means having a rotating shaft 41 for inserting the spool 1B into the short hub b2 side and rotating the spool 1B. By rotating the rotating shaft 41 in the spool 1B in the unwinding direction of the tail end film F by the spool turning means, the tail end film F is moved out of the slit roller a3. I'm out. In order to prevent excessive rotation of the spool 1B at this time, a torque detecting means 42 such as a torque meter or a torque limiter for detecting the torque at the time of rotation of the rotating shaft 41 is provided. The rotation is stopped.
また、 第 1 ( a ) 図, 第 1 ( b ) 図に示すように、 スプール 1 Bの各ハブ b 1、 b 2の内側には、 一文字状にリブ b 7、 b 8が設けられており、 このリブ b 7又は b 8の向きを利用してスプール 1 Bの回し過ぎを検出することもできる。即ち、 こ のリブ b 7、 b 8の向きによって、尾端フィルム Fが係止されるスプール孔 b 4の 開孔の向きが分かるため、 上記トルク検出手段 4 2に代えて、 リブ b 7、 b 8の向 7144 Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 (a) and 1 (b), ribs b7, b8 are provided in a single character inside the hubs b1, b2 of the spool 1B. Using the direction of the rib b7 or b8, it is also possible to detect excessive rotation of the spool 1B. That is, since the direction of the opening of the spool hole b4 in which the tail end film F is locked can be known from the direction of the ribs b7 and b8, the rib b7, b 8 direction 7144
20 き (位相) を検出する位相検出手段を設け、 リブ b 7又は b 8の向きから尾端フィ ルム Fを出しきつた時のスプール 1 Bの位相を検出し、その位相でスプール 1 Bが 停止するように回動軸 4 1の回動を制御するようにしてもよい。 これらリブ b 7、 b 8の向きはパトローネ 1のメーカ一によって異なるため、前記分別工程 2 0 0に おいてバーコード 3 0を用いて D Xバーコ一ドを読み取った際の読み取り結果を 記憶しておき、 ここでその読み取った結果のメーカー情報に基づいて、パトローネ 1毎に尾端フィルム Fを出しきつた時のスプール 1 Bのリブ b 7、 b 8の位置を判 別して切り替えるようにすることが好ましい。  20 phase (phase) is detected, and the phase of the spool 1B when the tail end film F is completely discharged from the direction of the rib b7 or b8 is detected, and the spool 1B is detected at that phase. The rotation of the rotation shaft 41 may be controlled so as to stop. Since the orientations of the ribs b7 and b8 differ depending on the manufacturer of the patrone 1, the results of reading the DX barcode using the barcode 30 in the sorting step 200 are stored. Here, based on the maker information of the read result, the position of the ribs b7 and b8 of the spool 1B when the tail end film F is completely discharged for each patrone 1 may be determined and switched. preferable.
なお、以降の各工程では、 パト口一ネ 1を工程内で搬送する最中は、尾端フィル ム Fがパトローネ 1内に再び巻き込まれないように、スプール 1 Bの位相を適宜の 位相固定手段を用いて固定した状態としておくことが好ましい。  In each of the subsequent steps, the phase of the spool 1B is fixed as appropriate so that the tail end film F is not re-engaged in the cartridge 1 while the cartridge 1 is being conveyed in the process. It is preferable to keep it fixed by using a means.
尾端フィルム有無検査工程 3 0 1において、パトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3の近 傍には光電センサ等の光学式の検出装置からなる尾端フィルム検出手段 4 3が配 置されており、尾端フィルム Fを巻き出した後は、 この尾端フィルム検出手段 4 3 によってパト口一ネ 1から尾端フィルム Fが出ているかどうかを自動検出する。こ こで尾端フィルム Fが検出されない尾端フィルム未露出品は、 N G品として工程外 へ排出する排出対象品とする。  In the tail end film presence / absence inspection step 301, a tail end film detecting means 43 comprising an optical detection device such as a photoelectric sensor is disposed near the slit a3 of the patrone 1. After unwinding the film F, the tail-end film detecting means 43 automatically detects whether the tail-end film F is coming out of the patrol opening 1 or not. Here, products that are not exposed at the tail end film F where the tail end film F is not detected are to be discharged out of the process as NG products.
尾端フィルム Fの存在が確認されたパト口一ネ 1は、検査夕一レット 4 0の回転 によりスリット口変形検査工程 3 0 2に送られる。このスリット口変形検査工程 3 0 2には、パトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3近傍に変位計 4 4が配置されており、 こ こでスリット口 a 3の変形がないかどうかの検査を行う。変位計 4 4は接触式、非 接触式のいずれでもよい。スリットロ a 3が変形しているパトローネ及び規格外寸 法品は、 N G品として工程外へ排出する排出対象品とする。 スリット口 a 3の変形検査をパスしたパトローネ 1は、検査ターレツト 4 0の回 転により全高検査工程 3 0 3に送られる。この全高検查工程 3 0 3にはパトローネ 1に近接して変位計 4 5が配置されており、この変位計 4 5によりパトローネ 1の 全高の検査を行う。 変位計 4 5は接触式、 非接触式のいずれでもよい。 この変位計 4 5により、キャップ a 2が浮き上がつていないかどうか及びパトローネ 1につぶ れが生じていないかどうかの検査が行われ、検査不適合品は、 N G品として工程外 へ排出する排出対象品とする。 The pawl opening 1 where the presence of the tail end film F is confirmed is sent to the slit opening deformation inspection process 302 by rotation of the inspection let 40. In this slit opening deformation inspection step 302, a displacement gauge 44 is arranged near the slit opening a3 of the patrone 1, and it is inspected whether the slit opening a3 is deformed. The displacement meter 4 4 may be either a contact type or a non-contact type. Patrones whose slit slit a3 is deformed and non-standard sized products are to be discharged out of the process as NG products. The patrone 1 that has passed the deformation inspection of the slit a3 is sent to the full height inspection process 303 by rotating the inspection turret 40. In the whole height inspection step 303, a displacement meter 45 is arranged close to the patrone 1, and the whole height of the patrone 1 is inspected by the displacement meter 45. The displacement meter 45 may be either a contact type or a non-contact type. The displacement meter 45 inspects whether the cap a2 is not lifted up and whether the patrone 1 has been crushed, and discharges nonconforming products out of the process as NG products. Products to be released.
全高検査をパスしたパト口一ネ 1は、検査夕一レット 4 0の回転により外周変形 検査工程 3 0 4に送られる。この外周変形検査工程 3 0 4ではパト口一ネ 1の表面 の検査を行う。ここにはパト口一ネ 1に近接して C C Dカメラ等の画像認識手段 4 6が配置されており、 これによつてパト口一ネ 1の全周を画像認識し、予め記憶し ておいた基準画像と比較することで、パトロ一ネ 1表面の凹み等の変形の有無の他、 傷ゃ鲭の有無を検査することができる。 また、 レーザー変位計を用い、 パト口一ネ 1表面の全周を検查するようにしてもよい。 ここで検査不適合品は、 N G品として 工程外へ排出する排出対象品とする。  The patrol mouth 1 that has passed the height inspection is sent to the outer peripheral deformation inspection process 304 by rotation of the inspection let 40. In the outer peripheral deformation inspection step 304, the surface of the gate opening 1 is inspected. Here, an image recognition means 46 such as a CCD camera is arranged close to the gate 1 so that the entire periphery of the gate 1 is image-recognized and stored in advance. By comparing with the reference image, it is possible to inspect whether or not there is a deformation such as a dent on the surface of the Patrone 1 and whether or not there is a flaw. Further, a laser displacement meter may be used to detect the entire circumference of the surface of the gate 1. Here, products that do not conform to the inspection are to be discharged as NG products out of the process.
外周変形検査をパスしたパト口一ネ 1は、検査ターレット 4 0の回転により C A Sパターン検査工程 3 0 5に送られる。 この C A Sパターン検查工程 3 0 5では、 触針プローブ 4 7 aを用いてパトローネ 1表面に設けられている C A Sコード a 6の導電絶縁パターンをチェックする。第 1 2図に示すように、搬送中のパトロー ネ 1を保持している保持手段 8 0に、 C A Sコード a 6を読み取るための読み取り 窓 8 4が形成されており、この読み取り窓 8 4からパトローネ 1の C A Sコード a 6が露出している。触針プローブ 4 7 aは、 同図に示すように、 この読み取り窓 8 4から C A Sコード a 6に向けて前進することで当接し、 コード情報を読み取る。 C A Sコード a 6には内部に収納されている写真フィルムの感度や枚数等の品 種判別情報が記録されるようになっており、 パトローネが装填された力メラでは、 この C A Sコード a 6を検出することで、写真フィルムの感度や枚数等の情報を自 動的に取得するようになっている。従って、パトローネ 1内に新たに収納する未露 光フィルムも、 この C A Sコード a 6に記録されているものと同一の感度、枚数で ある必要があり、 C A Sパターン検査工程 3 0 5では、 この C A Sコード a 6を読 み取ることによって、後工程において行われる未露光フィルムの係止の際にパト口 —ネ 1の種別が可能となるように、 その読み取り結果を別途記憶しておく。 The pawl opening 1 that has passed the outer peripheral deformation inspection is sent to the CAS pattern inspection step 305 by rotating the inspection turret 40. In the CAS pattern detection step 304, the conductive insulation pattern of the CAS code a6 provided on the surface of the cartridge 1 is checked using the stylus probe 47a. As shown in FIG. 12, a reading window 84 for reading the CAS code a 6 is formed in the holding means 80 for holding the cartridge 1 being conveyed, and the reading window 84 is formed from the reading window 84. The CAS code a6 of Patrone 1 is exposed. As shown in the same figure, the stylus probe 47a abuts by moving forward from the reading window 84 toward the CAS code a6, and reads the code information. The CAS code a6 records type discrimination information such as the sensitivity and number of sheets of photographic film stored in the camera. A melody loaded with a patrone detects this CAS code a6 By doing so, information such as the sensitivity and the number of photographic films can be obtained automatically. Therefore, the unexposed film newly stored in the patrone 1 also needs to have the same sensitivity and number of sheets as those recorded in the CAS code a6. By reading the code a6, the result of the reading is separately stored so that the type of the port 1 can be used when the unexposed film is locked in the subsequent process.
また、 コニカ社製パト口一ネのように、 C A Sコード a 6とは別に品種特定用バ —コード a 7が設けられている場合には、上記読み取り窓 8 4を品種特定用バーコ ード a 7も読み取り可能に形成しておき、このバーコード a 7をバーコードリーダ —4 7 bを用いて読み取るようにしてもよい。この C A Sパターン検查工程 3 0 5 において C A Sコード a 6や品種特定用バーコード a 7の読み取り不良が発生し た場合は、 N G品として工程外へ排出する排出対象品とする。  In addition, when a code for identifying the type is provided separately from the CAS code a6, as in the case of a Konica Pato mouth, the reading window 84 is provided with the barcode for identifying the type. The bar code a 7 may also be formed so as to be readable, and the bar code a 7 may be read using a bar code reader 47 b. In the case where the CAS pattern a6 or the barcode a7 for product type identification fails in the CAS pattern inspection step 305, the product is to be discharged out of the process as an NG product.
この C A Sパターン検査 3 0 5が終了すると、検査ターレット 4 0は適合品のパ トローネ 1を次工程へ受け渡す受け渡し位置まで回転して停止する。受け渡し位置 には受け渡し用ターレツト 5 0が配設されており、上記各工程での適合品のパト口 ーネ 1を検査ターレット 4 0から受け取り、所定角度の回転により次の内部検査ェ 程 4 0 0へと移送する。  After the completion of the CAS pattern inspection 305, the inspection turret 40 rotates to a transfer position where the compliant cartridge 1 is transferred to the next process and stops. At the delivery position, a delivery turret 50 is provided, and a pat port 1 of a conforming product in each of the above steps is received from the inspection turret 40, and the next internal inspection step 40 is performed by rotating at a predetermined angle. Transfer to 0.
また、上記各工程での排出対象品は、 ここでは検査ターレツト 4 0が更に回転し た位置で検查ターレット 4 0上から排出されるようになっているが、上記各工程に おいて不適合品とされた時点でその都度検査ターレット 4 0上から排出されるよ うにしてもよい。 ( 4 ) 内部検査工程 In this case, the products to be discharged in each of the above steps are discharged from the inspection turret 40 at a position where the inspection turret 40 is further rotated. It may be discharged from the inspection turret 40 each time it is determined. (4) Internal inspection process
外観検査工程 3 0 0をパスしたパトローネ 1は、受け渡し用夕一レツト 5 0を介 して、この受け渡し用夕一レット 5 0に隣接して配設された検査ターレット 6 0の 回転により内部検査工程 4 0 0に送られる。本実施形態に示す内部検査工程 4 0 0 は、漏光検查工程 4 0 1、異物検査工程 4 0 2を含んで構成されており、 ここでパ トローネ 1を分解することなく内部の検査を行う。 なお、 各工程 4 0 1、 4 0 2の 順序は任意である。  The patrone 1 that has passed the visual inspection process 300 is subjected to internal inspection by rotating the inspection turret 60 disposed adjacent to the delivery evening let 50 via the delivery evening let 50. It is sent to step 400. The internal inspection step 400 shown in the present embodiment includes a light leakage inspection step 401 and a foreign matter inspection step 402, where the internal inspection is performed without disassembling the cartridge 1. . The order of the steps 401 and 402 is arbitrary.
漏光検査工程 4 0 1では、スリット口 a 3に設けられたテレンプ a 4の遮光機能 を検査する。 この漏光検査工程 4 0 1における漏光検査の概念図を第 9図に示す。 漏光検査工程 4 0 1にはパトローネ 1を両側から挟むようにハウジング 6 1、 6 1 が設けられており、移送されてきたパト口一ネ 1の両側をスプール 1 Bの各ハブ b 1、 b 2を完全に遮光するようにして覆うようになっている。 各ハウジング 6 1、 6 1内には光源 6 2、 6 2が設けられ、 この光源 6 2、 6 2の点灯により所定の照 度の光をパトローネ 1のスプール軸方向から照射するようになっている。 また、パ トローネ 1のスリット口 a 3近傍には C C D等の感光素子からなる光量検出手段 6 3が配置されており、スリット口 a 3から漏れ出る光量を検出するようになって いる。  In the light leakage inspection step 401, the light-shielding function of the telempe a4 provided in the slit opening a3 is inspected. Fig. 9 shows a conceptual diagram of the light leakage inspection in the light leakage inspection step 401. In the light leakage inspection step 401, housings 61 and 61 are provided so as to sandwich the patrone 1 from both sides, and both sides of the transferred pat opening 1 are connected to each hub b 1 and b of the spool 1B. 2 is completely shaded and covered. Light sources 62 and 62 are provided in each of the housings 61 and 61, and the light sources 62 and 62 are turned on so that light of a predetermined illuminance is emitted from the direction of the spool axis of the cartridge 1. I have. A light amount detecting means 63 composed of a photosensitive element such as CCD is disposed near the slit a3 of the cartridge 1, and detects the amount of light leaking from the slit a3.
これによる漏光の検査は、まずスプール 1 Bを短ハブ b 2側に押付けた状態で長 ハブ b 1側又は両ハブ b 1、 b 2側から光を照射し、キャップ a 1の開口 a 2→ス プール 1 Bのフランジ b 3の回り込み—スリットロ a 3に到る光量を光量検出手 段 6 3で測定し、 これを数値化する。次いで、 同様にスプール 1 Bを長ハブ b 1側 に押付けた状態で短ハブ b 2側又は両ハブ b 1、 b 2側から光を照射し、 同様の経 路で漏れる光量を光量検出手段 6 3で測定し、 これを数値化する。 検出値は漏光判定手段 6 4に送られ、ここで予め定めておいた基準値と比較する ことで漏光の程度を判定する。その結果、基準値を越えて漏光が検出された塲合は、 N G品として工程外へ排出する排出対象品とする。 In the inspection of light leakage by this, first, while the spool 1B is pressed against the short hub b2 side, light is irradiated from the long hub b1 side or both hubs b1, b2 side, and the opening a2 of the cap a1 → The amount of light that reaches the flange b 3 of the spool 1 B—the slit light a 3 is measured by the light amount detection means 63 and quantified. Next, light is emitted from the short hub b2 or both hubs b1 and b2 while the spool 1B is pressed against the long hub b1 in the same manner, and the amount of light leaking through the same path is detected by the light amount detecting means 6. Measure in 3 and digitize this. The detected value is sent to the light leakage determining means 64, and the degree of light leakage is determined by comparing the detected value with a predetermined reference value. As a result, if light leakage is detected exceeding the reference value, the product is to be discharged out of the process as an NG product.
この漏光検査工程 4 0 1では、 検査環境は暗室 (暗箱) とし、 また、 尾端フィル ム Fは光量測定時の邪魔にならないように、スリット口 a 3から平らとなるように 適宜の保持手段を用いて姿勢を一定に保つようにしておくことが好ましい。  In the light leakage inspection step 401, the inspection environment is a dark room (dark box), and the tail end film F is properly held from the slit a3 so as not to be in the way when measuring the light amount. It is preferable that the posture is kept constant by using.
漏光検査工程 4 0 1をパスしたパトローネ 1は、検査夕一レット 6 0の回転によ り異物検査工程 4 0 2に送られる。 この異物検査工程 4 0 2では、パトローネ 1内 に侵入した砂粒等の異物の有無を検査する。  The patrone 1 that has passed the light leakage inspection step 401 is sent to the foreign matter inspection step 402 by the rotation of the inspection lenslet 60. In this foreign substance inspection step 402, the presence or absence of foreign substances such as sand particles that have entered the patrone 1 is inspected.
この異物検査工程 4 0 2における異物検査の概念図を第 1 0図に示す。異物検査 工程 4 0 2には、パトローネ本体 1 A及びスプ一ル 1 Bを動かないようパトローネ 1の両側から挟みつけてホールドするホルダー 6 5、 6 5と、パトローネ 1をこの ホルダー 6 5、 6 5にホールドした状態で、パトローネ 1のボディに所定周波数の 振動を与えるバイブレータ等の適宜の加振手段 6 6とが設けられている。  FIG. 10 shows a conceptual diagram of the foreign substance inspection in the foreign substance inspection step 402. In the foreign matter inspection process 402, holders 65, 65 holding the cartridge 1A and the spool 1B from both sides of the cartridge 1 so that they do not move, and the cartridge 1 Appropriate vibrating means 66 such as a vibrator for applying vibration of a predetermined frequency to the body of the patrone 1 while being held at 5 is provided.
異物検査時には、パト口一ネ 1の表面にノイズを検出するための音響探知プロ一 ブ(例えばマイクロフォン) からなるノイズ検出手段 6 7が当接され、 上記加振手 段 6 6によって振動が与えられたパトローネ 1内部のノイズを検出する。このとき 加振手段 6 6によって与えられる振動周波数は一定ではなく可変とすることが好 ましい。 ここでパトローネ 1内部に砂粒等の異物が侵入している場合、 ノイズ検出 手段 6 7により検出されるノイズは予め定められた正常時の値(基準値)よりも大 きくなるため、 この検出値を異物有無判定手段 6 8によって基準値と比較する。 こ こで検出ノイズが基準値を越えている場合は異物有りの N G品として工程外へ排 出する排出対象品とする。 異物検査工程 4 0 2が終了すると、検査ターレツト 6 0は反時計回りに所定角度 回転し、検査をパスした適合品のパトローネ 1を次工程へ移送する。 また、 上記各 工程 4 0 1 , 4 0 2での排出対象品は、 ここでは検査ターレツト 6 0が更に回転し た位置で検査夕一レット 6 0上から排出されるようになっているが、上記各工程 4 0 1 , 4 0 2において不適合品とされた時点でその都度検査ターレット 6 0上から 排出されるようにしてもよい。 At the time of foreign substance inspection, noise detection means 67 composed of an acoustic detection probe (for example, a microphone) for detecting noise is brought into contact with the surface of the door opening 1, and vibration is applied by the vibration means 66. Detected noise inside the patrone 1. At this time, it is preferable that the vibration frequency given by the vibration means 66 is not constant but variable. If foreign matter such as sand particles has entered the patrone 1 here, the noise detected by the noise detecting means 67 is larger than a predetermined normal value (reference value). Is compared with a reference value by means of foreign matter presence / absence determination means 68. If the detected noise exceeds the reference value, it is regarded as a product to be discharged out of the process as an NG product with foreign matter. When the foreign matter inspection process 402 is completed, the inspection turret 60 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, and the conformable patrone 1 that has passed the inspection is transferred to the next process. In addition, the products to be discharged in the above steps 401 and 402 are discharged from the inspection tray 60 at the position where the inspection turret 60 is further rotated. Each time a nonconforming product is determined in each of the steps 401 and 402, it may be discharged from the inspection turret 60 each time.
( 5 ) 回収工程  (5) Recovery process
内部検查工程 4 0 0をパスしたパトローネ 1は、所定の位置で検査ターレツト 6 0上から回収工程 5 0 0に送られる。 ここでは、前記 C A Sパターン検査工程 3 0 5において C A Sコード若しくは品種特定用バ一コ一ドから読み取られたパト口 ーネ 1の種類に基づいて種類別に分けられて回収される。  The patrone 1 that has passed the internal inspection step 400 is sent to the collection step 500 from the inspection turret 60 at a predetermined position. Here, in the above-mentioned CAS pattern inspection step 305, they are classified and collected according to the type of the pat code 1 read from the CAS code or the product identification barcode.
この回収工程 5 0 0には、複数のパトローネ 1を一度に収納可能なトレイ 7 0 a、 7 0 bが XY方向に移動可能な XYステージ (図示せず)上に載置されており、 そ の XY方向の移動によっていずれかのトレィ 7 0 a、 7 0 bが検查ターレツト 6 0 のパトローネ排出位置に位置してパトロ一ネ 1を受け入れることができるように なっている。  In the collection step 500, trays 70a and 70b capable of storing a plurality of patrones 1 at a time are placed on an XY stage (not shown) that can move in the XY direction. Due to the movement in the XY direction, either tray 70a, 70b is located at the cartridge discharge position of the detector pallet 60 and can receive the cartridge 1.
トレイ 7 0 a、 7 0 bの底部には、 第 1 1図に示すように、 パトローネ 1のスプ —ル 1 Bの短ハブ b 2内に挿入してスプール 1 Bを回転不能に保持するスプール 軸固定用突起 7 1が、収納されるパト口一ネ 1毎に突設されており、検査ターレツ ト 6 0から移送された適合品の各パト口一ネ 1を、それぞれスプール軸固定用突起 7 1に嵌合させて収納保持する。  At the bottom of the trays 70a and 70b, as shown in Fig. 11, a spool is inserted into the short hub b2 of the spool 1B of the cartridge 1 to hold the spool 1B so that it cannot rotate. A shaft fixing projection 71 protrudes from each of the pat ports 1 to be stored, and each of the pat ports 1 of the conforming product transferred from the inspection turret 60 is provided with a spool shaft fixing boss. 7 Fit into 1 and store and hold.
検査ターレツト 6 0から移送されるパトローネ 1は、種類毎にトレィ 7 0 a、 7 O bに分けられる。 ここで分けられるパトローネ 1の種類としては、感度別、 枚数 別、 ブランド別等が挙げられる。 また、 一つのトレイの中を種類毎に区分けするこ とで、一つのトレイで複数種類のパトローネ 1を一度に収納するようにしてもよい。 なお、 各パトローネ 1は、 トレイ 7 0 a、 7 0 b内においてスプール 1 Bの位相及 びスリットロ a 3の向きが全て揃えられて固定される。 The patrone 1 transferred from the inspection turret 60 is divided into trays 70a and 70b for each type. The types of patrones that can be divided here are: And brands. In addition, a single tray may store a plurality of types of patrones 1 at a time by dividing the tray into types. In addition, each cartridge 1 is fixed in trays 70a and 70b so that the phase of spool 1B and the direction of slit slot a3 are all aligned.
トレイ 7 0 a、 7 0 bは通い函としての使用も可能であり、複数のパトローネ 1 を収納した状態で検査工程から搬送する。  The trays 70a and 70b can also be used as return boxes, and transport from the inspection process in a state where a plurality of patrones 1 are stored.
以上の検査が終了し、全ての検査をパスした適合品のパト口一ネ 1は、未露光の フィルムを装填することにより再使用品としての利用が可能なパトローネである と判断できるため、 以後、 未露光のフィルムを装填する工程へと移送される。  After the above inspections have been completed and all the inspections have passed the inspection, it is possible to determine that the patroller 1 is a patrone that can be used as a reused product by loading unexposed film. The film is transferred to a step of loading an unexposed film.
以下、本発明の第 2の目的を達成するための実施の形態について詳細に説明する。 まず、以下に説明する本発明の各見地において共通する写真用パト口一ネ(以下、 単にパトローネという) の構成について説明する。  Hereinafter, an embodiment for achieving the second object of the present invention will be described in detail. First, a description will be given of the configuration of a photographic port (hereinafter simply referred to as a patrone) common to all aspects of the present invention described below.
第 1 3 ( a ) 図は、 写真用パト口一ネの外観構成を示す斜視図、 第 1 3 ( b ) 図 はその断面図、 第 1 4 ( a ) 図はパトローネ内に収容されるスプールの斜視図、 第 1 4 ( b ) 図はスプールの中央断面図である。 ここでは最も代表的な 3 5 mmの写 真フィルムを収容する 1 3 5フィルムパトローネについて説明する。  Fig. 13 (a) is a perspective view showing the external configuration of the photo patrol door, Fig. 13 (b) is a cross-sectional view thereof, and Fig. 14 (a) is a spool housed in the cartridge. FIG. 14 (b) is a central sectional view of the spool. Here, we will describe the 135 film cartridge that holds the most typical 35 mm photographic film.
パトローネ 1は、鋼板を用いて円筒状に形成されたパトローネ本体 1 A内にスプ ール 1 Bを内蔵し、その両側にそれぞれキャップ a 1、 a 1をかしめ固定して構成 されている。各キャップ a 1には中心に開口 a 2が形成されており、スプール 1 B はその両端にそれぞれ突出している各ハブ b 1、 b 1が上記開口 a 2から外部に突 出して支承されることで、 パトローネ本体 1 A内において回転可能とされている。 パトローネ本体 1 Aは、円筒状に丸められた鋼板の両端の内面同士を間隙をおい て重ね合わせると共に、該重ね合わせ部を同一方向に折り曲げると共にパトローネ 本体 1 Aの周方向に延出し、 その重ね合わせ部に形成される間隙が写真フィルム (図示せず)を出し入れする際のスリット口 a 3となり、 このスリット口 a 3に遮 光性を持たせるためのテレンプ a 4が設けられている。 The patrone 1 is configured such that a spool 1B is built in a patrone body 1A formed into a cylindrical shape using a steel plate, and caps a1 and a1 are caulked and fixed to both sides thereof. An opening a2 is formed at the center of each cap a1, and each hub b1, b1 protruding at both ends of the spool 1B is supported by projecting outside from the opening a2. And it is rotatable inside the cartridge body 1A. The patrone main body 1A overlaps the inner surfaces of both ends of a cylindrically rolled steel plate with a gap therebetween, and folds the overlapped portion in the same direction and The main body 1A extends in the circumferential direction, and the gap formed in the overlapping portion becomes a slit a3 for inserting and removing a photographic film (not shown). The slit a3 has a light shielding property. There is a telep for a4.
スプール 1 Bは、写真フィルムを卷き取る巻取り軸 b 2の両端にそれぞれフラン ジ b 3、 b 3が、 更にその外側にそれぞれ Λブ b 1、 b 1が同心状に設けられてい る。巻取り軸 b 2には、写真フィルムの先端が挿入されるスリツト状のスプール孔 b 4が形成され、そのスプール孔 b 4内には係止爪 b 5と該係止爪 b 5に係止され た写真フィルムの抜けを防止するための押えリブ b 6とが対向状に設けられてい る。 第 1 4 ( a ) 図, 第 1 4 ( b ) 図に示す態様では、 係止爪 b 5はスプ一ル孔 b 4内において所定間隔をもって 2つ設けられ、押えリブ b 6はその間に 1つだけ設 けられているが、係止爪 b 5及び押えリブ b 6の数、形状については特に限定され ない。  The spool 1B is provided with flanges b3, b3 at both ends of a take-up shaft b2 for winding a photographic film, and concentrically provided with hubs b1, b1, respectively at the outside thereof. A slit-shaped spool hole b4 into which the leading end of the photographic film is inserted is formed in the take-up shaft b2, and a locking claw b5 and a locking claw b5 are locked in the spool hole b4. A holding rib b6 for preventing the detached photographic film from being provided is provided in opposition. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), two locking claws b5 are provided at predetermined intervals in the sprue hole b4, and the holding rib b6 is located between the two. Although only one is provided, the number and shape of the locking claw b5 and the holding rib b6 are not particularly limited.
第 1 5図は、本発明の第 1の見地に係る写真用フィルムの製造方法を実施するた めに好適な製造装置の一例を示す概略斜視図である。 この製造装置 2において、 2 9はパトローネ 1を保持するパトローネホルダーであり、パトローネ 1は、そのス リット口 a 3が後述するフィルムシユート 2 2側に臨むように、このパトローネホ ルダー 2 9に保持されてセッ卜される。  FIG. 15 is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a manufacturing apparatus suitable for carrying out the photographic film manufacturing method according to the first aspect of the present invention. In the manufacturing apparatus 2, reference numeral 29 denotes a patrone holder for holding the patrone 1, and the patrone 1 is held in the patrone holder 29 so that the slit opening a3 faces the film shot 22 described later. It is set.
写真フィルムを上記パトローネ 1に対して供給するためのフィルムシュート 2 2は、上記パトローネホルダ一 2 9に保持されたパ卜口一ネ 1のスリット口 a 3に 一端が臨むように直線状に配設され、ガイドレール 2 3に沿ってスライド可能なス ライド部材 2 4を介して該フィルムシュート 2 2の配設方向に沿ってスライド可 能に設けられている。従って、 フィルムシュート 2 2は、 図示しない駆動手段によ つてスライドすることで、その先端がパト口一ネホルダー 2 9にセットされたパト 07144 The film chute 22 for supplying the photographic film to the patrone 1 is linearly arranged so that one end faces the slit a3 of the patone 1 held by the patrone holder 29. The film chute 22 is slidable along a direction in which the film chute 22 is disposed via a slide member 24 slidable along the guide rail 23. Therefore, the film chute 22 is slid by a driving means (not shown), so that the tip of the film chute 22 is set in the gate opening holder 29. 07144
28 ローネ 1のスリツトロ a 3に対して接離可能とされている。 28 Rhone 1 can be separated from and separated from Slitstro a 3.
なお、 2 2 a、 2 2 aはフィルムシュート 2 2内の写真フィルムに接して該写真 フィルムをパトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3へ向けて移送するためのフィルム送り ローラであり、 フィルムシュート 2 2を挟んで上下に対向状に配設され、 図示しな い駆動手段により駆動される。  In addition, 22 a and 22 a are film feed rollers for contacting the photographic film in the film chute 22 and transferring the photographic film toward the slit a 3 of the patrone 1. They are disposed vertically opposite to each other and are driven by driving means (not shown).
パトローネ 1がパトローネホルダ一 2 9にセッ卜された状態で、該パトロ一ネ 1 のスリット口 a 3とフィルムシュート 2 2の先端との間には、写真フィルムをパト ローネ 1のスプールに係止するためのガイドをなすガイド部材 3が配置されてい る。  With the patrone 1 set in the patrone holder 29, the photographic film is locked to the spool of the patrone 1 between the slit opening a3 of the patrone 1 and the tip of the film chute 22. A guide member 3 serving as a guide for the operation is provided.
このガイド部材 3は、第 1 6図に示すように、平板状の先端ガイド部 3 aに同じ く平板状の後端ガイド部 3 bが所定の角度を持って傾斜状に接続されて形成され た略への字状をなしている。上記先端ガイド部 3 aと後端ガイド部 3 bとは、所定 の半径を有する曲部 3 cによって接続されていることが好ましく、これら先端ガイ ド部 3 a、曲部 3 c及び後端ガイド部 3 bが、スリット口 a 3の幅とほぼ同幅に形 成されている。これらは金属薄板を用いて屈曲形成すれば簡単に一体形成すること ができる。  As shown in FIG. 16, the guide member 3 is formed by connecting a flat rear guide portion 3b and a flat rear guide portion 3b at a predetermined angle to the flat front guide portion 3a. It is shaped like a letter. It is preferable that the tip guide portion 3a and the rear end guide portion 3b are connected by a curved portion 3c having a predetermined radius, and the tip guide portion 3a, the curved portion 3c and the rear end guide are connected. The portion 3b is formed to have substantially the same width as the width of the slit opening a3. These can be easily formed integrally by bending and using a thin metal plate.
また、先端ガイド部 3 aと後端ガイド部 3 bの各平面がなす内側の角度ひは、 1 1 0 ° ± 2 0 ° が好ましい。上記範囲を外れると、 このガイド部材 3がスリット口 a 3からパト口一ネ 1内に挿入された際、 その先端ガイド部 3 aが、 第 1 4 ( a ) 図, 第 1 4 (b ) 図に示すスプール 1 Bのスプール孔 b 4に向かわず、 写真フィル ムをこのスプール孔 b 4まで案内することが困難となる。より好ましくは 1 1 0 ° ± 5 ° 、 最も好ましくは 1 1 0 ° である。  In addition, it is preferable that the inner angle formed by the planes of the front end guide portion 3a and the rear end guide portion 3b is 110 ° ± 20 °. When the guide member 3 is out of the above range, when the guide member 3 is inserted from the slit opening a3 into the patrol opening 1, the leading end guide portion 3a is moved to the position shown in FIG. 14 (a), FIG. 14 (b). It is difficult to guide the photographic film to the spool hole b4 without going to the spool hole b4 of the spool 1B shown in the figure. More preferably, it is 110 ° ± 5 °, most preferably 110 °.
なお、先端ガイド部 3 aの先端はその両側部が切り欠かれ、スプール 1 Bのスプ ール孔 b 4の幅にほぼ合致するように幅狭状に形成されている。 The distal end of the distal end guide portion 3a is cut off on both sides, and the spool 1B It is formed in a narrow shape so as to substantially match the width of the hole b4.
パトローネホルダ一 2 9の側方には、上記ガイド部材 3を支持するためのプロッ ク 2 5がフィルムシュート 2 2によるフィルムの送り方向に沿って、図示しない駆 動手段によってスライド可能に配設されており、このブロック 2 5からパトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3とフィルムシュート 2 2の先端との間に向けて回動軸 2 6が 図示しない駆動手段により回動可能に突出している。  At the side of the patrone holder 29, a block 25 for supporting the guide member 3 is slidably provided by driving means (not shown) along a film feeding direction by the film chute 22. A rotation shaft 26 projects from the block 25 to a position between the slit opening a3 of the cartridge 1 and the tip of the film chute 22 so as to be rotatable by driving means (not shown).
また、プロック 2 5には、上下方向に切り欠かれた長孔 2 5 aが形成されており、 回動軸 2 6は、 この長孔 2 5 a内から突出することで、長孔 2 5 aに沿って昇降可 能とされている。 この回動軸 2 6のブロック 2 5からの突出量は、 ブロック 2 5が パトローネホルダー 2 9の側方に並置するようにスライド移動し(第 1 5図におけ る最左端の位置)、且つ、回動軸 2 6が長孔 2 5 aの最下端まで下降した状態でも、 その回動軸 2 6の先端がパトローネホルダ一 2 9及びそれに保持されているパト 口一ネ 1のいずれにも当接することのない程度とされている。  The block 25 has an elongated hole 25a cut out in the vertical direction, and the rotating shaft 26 projects from the elongated hole 25a so that the elongated hole 25a is formed. It is possible to move up and down along a. The amount of protrusion of the rotating shaft 26 from the block 25 is slid so that the block 25 is juxtaposed to the side of the patrone holder 29 (the leftmost position in FIG. 15), and However, even when the rotating shaft 26 is lowered to the lowermost end of the slot 25a, the tip of the rotating shaft 26 is attached to either the cartridge holder 29 or the pocket 1 held by it. It is assumed that they do not touch.
回動軸 2 6の外周面には、その軸方向に沿って延びる取付腕 2 6 aが突設されて いる。ガイド部材 3は、その先端ガイド部 3 aの先端がパトローネホルダー 2 9に セットされたパトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3に向かい、且つ後端ガイド部 3 bがス リット口 a 3に対してパトローネ本体 1 A側 (図示下側) に傾斜した状態、 即ち、 略への字状に屈曲している内側が図示下側に配置されるように、その後端ガイド部 3 bの後端側の外側面が上記取付腕 2 6 aに取り付けられ、回動軸 2 6の回動によ つてガイド部材 3の曲部 3 cにほぼ沿うように回動するようになっている(第 1 7 ( a ) 図参照) 。  A mounting arm 26a protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating shaft 26 extends along the axial direction thereof. The guide member 3 has a front end guide portion 3a whose front end faces the slit opening a3 of the patrone 1 set in the patrone holder 29, and whose rear end guide portion 3b faces the slit opening a3. 1 The outer surface on the rear end side of the rear end guide portion 3b so that it is inclined to the A side (lower side in the figure), that is, the inside bent in a substantially rectangular shape is arranged on the lower side in the figure. Is attached to the mounting arm 26a, and is rotated substantially along the curved portion 3c of the guide member 3 by the rotation of the rotation shaft 26 (first 17 (a)). See figure).
なお、 この回動軸 2 6は、ガイド部材 3の先端ガイド部 3 aがパトローネホルダ 一 2 2にセッ卜されたパトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3のパトローネ本体 1 Aに対 する延出方向に平行となる位置 (第 1 7 ( a ) 図の状態) と、 ガイド部材 3の後端 ガイド部 3 bが上記スリット口 a 3の延出方向と平行となる位置(第 1 7 ( c ) 図 の状態) との間で、 時計方向及び反時計方向に回動する。 The pivot shaft 26 is arranged so that the distal end guide portion 3a of the guide member 3 is opposed to the patrone body 1A of the slit a3 of the patrone 1 set in the patrone holder 122. (The state shown in Fig. 17 (a)) and the position where the rear end guide portion 3b of the guide member 3 is parallel to the extension direction of the slit opening a3 (first position). 7 (c) state clockwise and counterclockwise.
次に、 かかる製造装置を用いた写真用フィルムの製造方法について説明する。 まず、 第 1 3 ( a ) 図, 第 1 3 ( b ) 図に示すようにスプール 1 Bを内蔵すると 共に両側がそれぞれキヤップ a 1、 a 1で遮蔽されたパトロ一ネ 1を、パトローネ ホルダー 2 9に手動又は自動でセッ卜し、パトローネ 1の位置決めを行う。 ここで パトローネ 1は、そのスリット口 a 3が図示上方に位置し、且つフィルムシュート Next, a method of manufacturing a photographic film using the manufacturing apparatus will be described. First, as shown in Fig. 13 (a) and Fig. 13 (b), a spool 1B is built in, and both sides are covered with caps a1 and a1, respectively. Set manually or automatically in 9 to position patrone 1. Here, the patrone 1 has its slit opening a 3 located at the upper part of the drawing and a film chute.
2 2の先端に向くように配置されて保持され、 更に、 スプール 1 Bの向きが、 第 1 7 ( a )図に示すようにスプール孔 b 4の入口側がスリット口 a 3の根元方向を向 く位置で、 適宜の位置ロック手段を用いてロックされる。 The spool 1B is arranged and held so as to face the tip of the spool 22. Further, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), the inlet side of the spool hole b4 faces the root direction of the slit port a3 as shown in FIG. 17 (a). At the right position and locked using appropriate position locking means.
パトローネ 1がパトローネホルダー 2 2にセッ卜され、スプール 1 Bの位置が口 ックされると、 回動軸 2 6が第 1 7 ( a ) 図の状態から長孔 2 5 aを下降し、 その 先端に取り付けられているガイド部材 3がパトローネ 1のスリツトロ a 3の近傍 に配置される。 このときガイド部材 3は、その先端ガイド部 3 aがパトローネ本体 1 Aに対するスリットロ a 3の延出方向(フィルムシュート 2 2によるフィルムの 送り方向) と平行となり、且つ後端ガイド部 3 bがスリットロ a 3に対してパト口 ーネ本体 1 A側 (図示下側) に位置するように保持されている。  When the patrone 1 is set in the patrone holder 22 and the position of the spool 1 B is locked, the rotating shaft 26 descends the long hole 25 a from the state shown in FIG. 17 (a). The guide member 3 attached to the tip is disposed near the slittro a3 of the patrone 1. At this time, the guide member 3 has its leading end guide portion 3a parallel to the extending direction of the slit roller a3 with respect to the cartridge body 1A (the direction in which the film is fed by the film chute 22), and the trailing end guide portion 3b has the slit groove portion 3b. It is held so that it is located on the part 1A side (lower side in the figure) of the pat mouth body a3.
ガイド部材 3の先端ガイド部 3 aが、パトローネ 1のスリットロ a 3の高さまで くると、 回動軸 2 6は下降を停止する。 次いで、 ブロック 2 5はフィルムの送り方 向と同一方向に前進し、回動軸 2 6に取り付けられたガイド部材 3の先端ガイド部 When the leading end guide portion 3a of the guide member 3 reaches the height of the slit slot a3 of the patrone 1, the rotating shaft 26 stops descending. Next, the block 25 advances in the same direction as the film feeding direction, and the leading end guide portion of the guide member 3 attached to the rotating shaft 26.
3 aをパトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3から挿入する。 これによりガイド部材 3は、 その先端ガイド部 3 aがブロック 2 5の前進によりスリットロ a 3の変形ゃテレ 03 07144 3 Insert a through the slit a3 of the patrone 1. As a result, the guide member 3 has its tip guide portion 3a deformed by slit block a3 due to the advance of the block 25. 03 07144
31 ンプを傷めることなくスリット口 a 3の延出方向と平行に直進状に挿入される(第 1 7 ( b ) 図参照) 。  It is inserted in a straight line parallel to the extension direction of the slit opening a3 without damaging the pump (see Fig. 17 (b)).
このガイド部材 3の挿入が開始されると、その途中から回動軸 2 6は微小角度範 囲で時計方向及び反時計方向に交互に回動を繰り返し、ブロック 2 5の前進動作と 同時にガイド部材 3を揺動させ、ガイド部材 3の挿入が円滑に行われるようにして いる。  When the insertion of the guide member 3 is started, the rotation shaft 26 repeatedly rotates clockwise and counterclockwise alternately within a small angle range halfway through the insertion, and simultaneously with the forward movement of the block 25, the guide member 3 is swung so that the guide member 3 can be smoothly inserted.
ガイド部材 3の先端ガイド部 3 aのほぼ全体がスリット口 a 3内に挿入され、そ れに続く曲部 3 c近傍がスリット口 a 3まで到達すると、 プロック 2 5は、 回動軸 2 6を徐々に回動させることで、ガイド部材 3の後端ガイド部 3 bがスリット口 a 3の延出方向と平行となるようにガイド部材 3を傾斜側に向けて図示反時計方向 に回転させながら、ガイド部材 3の後端ガイド部 3 bがスリット口 a 3に挿入され るまで更に前進する。 これによりガイド部材 3の先端ガイド部 3 aの先端は、パト 口一ネ 1内においてスプール 1 Bへ向かい、そのスプール孔 b 4の入口近傍まで接 近する。 また、 これとほぼ同時に、 フィルムシュート 2 2及びフィルム送りローラ 2 2 aもガイドレール 2 3に沿ってパト口一ネ 1に向けて前進し、フィルムシュ一 ト 2 2の先端がパトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3に近接する位置で停止する(第 1 7 ( c ) 図参照) 。  When almost the entirety of the distal end guide portion 3a of the guide member 3 is inserted into the slit opening a3, and the vicinity of the curved portion 3c that reaches the slit opening a3, the block 25 becomes the rotating shaft 26. By gradually rotating the guide member 3, the guide member 3 is rotated counterclockwise in the drawing toward the inclined side so that the rear end guide portion 3 b of the guide member 3 is parallel to the extending direction of the slit opening a 3. While the guide member 3 is further advanced until the rear end guide portion 3b is inserted into the slit opening a3. As a result, the distal end of the distal end guide portion 3a of the guide member 3 moves toward the spool 1B in the opening 1 and comes close to the vicinity of the inlet of the spool hole b4. Almost at the same time, the film chute 22 and the film feed roller 22 a also move forward along the guide rail 23 toward the patrol opening 1, and the leading end of the film shoot 22 extends into the slit of the cartridge 1. Stop at a position close to mouth a3 (see Fig. 17 (c)).
次いで、未露光の写真フィルム Fがフィルムシュート 2 2を通してフィルム送り ローラ 2 2 aにより送り出される。フィルムシュート 2 2の先端から送り出された 写真フィルム Fは、パト口一ネ 1のスリット口 a 3に挿入されたガイド部材 3の傾 斜側(図示下側)の面に沿って接触しつつそのスリット口 a 3に挿入される。即ち、 写真フィルム Fは、パト口一ネ 1のスリットロ a 3から一部出ているガイド部材 3 の後端ガイド部 3 bの下面に沿ってスリット口 a 3に挿入され、次いで、曲部 3 c 4 Next, the unexposed photographic film F is fed out through the film chute 22 by the film feed roller 22a. The photographic film F sent from the leading end of the film chute 22 contacts the guide member 3 inserted into the slit a 3 of the pawl opening 1 while contacting along the inclined side (lower side in the figure) of the guide member 3. Inserted into slit a3. That is, the photographic film F is inserted into the slit a3 along the lower surface of the rear end guide portion 3b of the guide member 3 which is partially protruded from the slit a3 of the patrol opening 1, and then the curved portion 3 c Four
32 の内側に突き当たり、その曲面に沿ってスプール 1 B方向に向きが変えられ、続い て先端ガイド部 3 aの下面に沿ってスプール孔 b 4まで案内される。先端がスプー ル孔 b 4まで案内された写真フィルム Fは、 第 1 4 ( a ) 図, 第 1 4 (b ) 図に示 すスプール孔 b 4内に設けられている各係止爪 b 5、 b 5に、写真フィルム F先端 に形成されている係止孔が係合することで係止される (第 1 7 ( d ) 図参照) 。 写真フィルム Fがスプール 1 Bに係止されると、フィルムシュート 2 2及びフィ ルム送りローラ 2 2 aはガイドレール 2 3に沿って後退する。このときフィルムシ ユー卜 2 2内の写真フィルム Fはスプール 1 Bに係止されているため後退しない。 次いで、 ブロック 2 5は後退を開始し、 回動軸 2 6に取り付けられたガイド部材 3の後端ガイド部 3 bをパトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3から引き出す。このとき後 端ガイド部 3 bは、ブロック 2 5の後退によりスリットロ a 3の延出方向と平行に 直進状に引き出される。 これと同時に、 回動軸 2 6は挿入時と同様に微小角度範囲 で回動を繰り返すことで、ガイド部材 3の引き出しが円滑に行われるようにブロッ ク 2 5の後退動作と共にガイド部材 3を揺動させる。  32, it is turned in the direction of the spool 1B along the curved surface, and then guided along the lower surface of the tip guide portion 3a to the spool hole b4. The photographic film F whose leading end is guided to the spool hole b4 is provided with each of the locking claws b5 provided in the spool hole b4 shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b). The locking holes formed in the leading end of the photographic film F are locked with b5 and b5 (see FIG. 17 (d)). When the photographic film F is locked on the spool 1B, the film chute 22 and the film feed roller 22a move back along the guide rail 23. At this time, the photographic film F in the film shoot 22 does not retract because it is locked on the spool 1B. Next, the block 25 starts to retreat, and the rear end guide portion 3 b of the guide member 3 attached to the rotating shaft 26 is pulled out from the slit a 3 of the cartridge 1. At this time, the rear end guide portion 3b is pulled out in a straight line parallel to the extending direction of the slit slot a3 by the retreat of the block 25. At the same time, the rotating shaft 26 repeats rotating within a minute angle range as in the case of insertion, so that the guide member 3 is pulled out together with the block member 25 so that the guide member 3 can be pulled out smoothly. Rock it.
その後、 ブロック 2 5は、 後退動作と同時に回動軸 2 6を徐々に回動しながら、 ガイド部材 3の先端ガイド部 3 aがスリットロ a 3の延出方向と平行となるよう に、 ガイド部材 3を傾斜側に向けて図示時計方向に回転させ、 その後、 先端ガイド 部 3 aを直進状に引き出し、ガイド部材 3をスリット口 a 3から取り出す。 このガ ィド部材 3の取り出し動作において、ガイド部材 3の先端ガイド部 3 a及び後端ガ ィド部 3 bは、その平面に沿うようにそれぞれ直進状に引き出されるため、挿入動 作時と同様、パトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3と干渉することがほとんどなく、仮に 接触してもガイド部材 3の先端の角部が接触することがないため、そのスリット口 a 3やテレンプに与える影響は少ない。 ガイド部材 3が取り出されると、そのガイド部材 3の回転により、後端ガイド部 3 bの後端部がパトローネ 1のスリツトロ a 3から出ている写真フィルム Fの上 面に当接し、更に回転するに伴って、スリット口 a 3とフィルムシュート 2 2との 間の写真フィルム Fのフィルムパスラインを下方に V字状に屈曲させる (第 1 7 ( e ) 図参照) 。 このとき、 写真フィルム Fの先端はスプール 1 Bに係止されて固 定されているため、フィルムパスラインの曲がりに伴ってフィルムシュート 2 2内 に位置している写真フィルム Fがパトローネ 1に向けて移動することとなる。従つ て、 このときの写真フィルム Fの移動を適宜の手段により検知することで、写真フ イルム Fの先端がスプール 1 Bに確実に係止されたことを自動的に検出すること が可能である。 Thereafter, the block 25 is gradually rotated at the same time as the retreating operation and the rotating shaft 26 is rotated so that the distal end guide portion 3 a of the guide member 3 is parallel to the extending direction of the slit b a 3. 3 is turned clockwise in the figure toward the inclined side, and then the distal end guide portion 3a is pulled straight out, and the guide member 3 is taken out from the slit opening a3. In the removal operation of the guide member 3, the front end guide portion 3a and the rear end guide portion 3b of the guide member 3 are respectively drawn out in a straight line along the plane, so that the insertion operation is not performed. Similarly, there is almost no interference with the slit opening a3 of the patrone 1, and even if it does, the corner of the tip of the guide member 3 does not contact, so that there is little effect on the slit opening a3 and telemump. . When the guide member 3 is removed, the rotation of the guide member 3 causes the rear end of the rear end guide portion 3b to come into contact with the upper surface of the photographic film F protruding from the slittro a3 of the patrone 1, and further rotated. Accordingly, the film path line of the photographic film F between the slit a3 and the film chute 22 is bent downward in a V-shape (see FIG. 17 (e)). At this time, since the leading end of the photographic film F is locked and fixed to the spool 1B, the photographic film F located in the film chute 22 is directed toward the cartridge 1 with the bending of the film path line. Will move. Therefore, by detecting the movement of the photographic film F at this time by appropriate means, it is possible to automatically detect that the leading end of the photographic film F is securely locked to the spool 1B. is there.
なお、この写真フィルム Fの上面側に当接するガイド部材 3の後端部分又は取付 腕 2 6 aは、 図示するように曲面状に形成することで、 当接時に写真フィルム Fに 与えるダメージを少なくすることが望ましい。  The rear end portion of the guide member 3 or the mounting arm 26a, which comes into contact with the upper surface of the photographic film F, is formed into a curved surface as shown in the figure, so that the damage to the photographic film F at the time of contact is reduced. It is desirable to do.
ガイド部材 3がパトローネ 1外へ取り出された後、回動軸 2 6は長孔 2 5 aに沿 つて上昇し、 ガイド部材 3をフィルムパスラインから上方へ退避させる。 これによ り写真フィルム Fのパスラインは直線状となる (第 1 7 ( f ) 図、 第 1 7 ( g ) 図 参照)。次いで、 パトローネ 1のスプール 1 B及びフィルム送りローラ 2 2 aを回 転させることで、 スプール 1 Bに係止した写真フィルム Fを巻き取る。 このとき、 ガイド部材 3はパト口一ネ 1から取り出され、フィルムパスライン上からも退避し ているため、 巻き取り時に写真フィルム Fがガイド部材 3と接触することはなく、 写真フィルム Fに傷等が発生する心配はない。この写真フィルム Fの巻き取りによ り写真用フィルムが完成する。  After the guide member 3 is taken out of the patrone 1, the rotating shaft 26 moves up along the long hole 25a to retract the guide member 3 upward from the film path line. As a result, the pass line of the photographic film F becomes straight (see Fig. 17 (f) and Fig. 17 (g)). Next, the photographic film F locked on the spool 1B is wound up by rotating the spool 1B of the patrone 1 and the film feed roller 22a. At this time, since the guide member 3 is taken out from the opening 1 and retracted from the film path line, the photographic film F does not come into contact with the guide member 3 at the time of winding, and the photographic film F is damaged. There is no need to worry about the occurrence. The photographic film is completed by winding the photographic film F.
次に、 本発明の第 2の見地に係る写真用フィルムの製造方法について説明する。 07144 Next, a method for producing a photographic film according to the second aspect of the present invention will be described. 07144
34 この第 2の見地に係る製造方法を実施するために使用するのに好適な製造装置は、 前述の第 1の見地において説明した製造装置 2におけるガイド部材の構成が異な つている。  34 A manufacturing apparatus suitable for use in carrying out the manufacturing method according to the second aspect has a different configuration of the guide member in the manufacturing apparatus 2 described in the first aspect.
このガイド部材の構成を第 1 8 ( a) 図, 第 1 8 (b ) 図に示す。 なお、 以下の 説明において、 第 1 3 ( a ) 図〜第 1 7 ( g ) 図と同一符号は同一構成を示してい る。  The configuration of this guide member is shown in Figs. 18 (a) and 18 (b). In the following description, the same reference numerals as those in FIGS. 13 (a) to 17 (g) denote the same components.
ガイド部材 4は、 図示上側に位置する上側ガイド板 4 1と、 図示下側に位置する 下側ガイド板 4 2と、その両側を遮蔽する側部ガイド部 4 3、 4 4とを有する中空 状を呈しており、その先端側に上側ガイド板 4 1、下側ガイド板 4 2及び側部ガイ ド部 4 3、 4 4とで形成された直線状に延びる先端ガイド部 4 aと、後端側に同じ く上側ガイド板 4 1、下側ガイド板 4 2及び側部ガイド部 4 3、 4 4とで形成され た直線状に延びる後端ガイド部 4 bとが所定の角度で傾斜状に接続され、 また、先 端ガイド部 4 aと後端ガイド部 4 bとの間に所定の半径を有する曲部 4 cが設け られた略への字状をなし、 中空の内部にフィルム通路 Pを形成している。 また、 先 端ガイド部 4 aにおける上側ガイド板 4 1及び下側ガイド板 4 2の先端は、その両 側部が切り欠かれ、スプール 1 Bのスプ一ル孔 b 4の幅にほぼ合致するように幅狭 状に形成されている。  The guide member 4 has a hollow shape having an upper guide plate 41 located on the upper side in the figure, a lower guide plate 42 located on the lower side in the figure, and side guide portions 43 and 44 shielding both sides thereof. A front end guide portion 4a extending linearly formed by an upper guide plate 41, a lower guide plate 42, and side guide portions 43, 44 at a front end thereof, and a rear end. Similarly, the rear guide 4b, which is formed by the upper guide plate 41, the lower guide plate 42, and the side guides 43, 44, which are linearly formed, is inclined at a predetermined angle. It is connected in a substantially rectangular shape having a curved portion 4c having a predetermined radius between the leading end guide portion 4a and the trailing end guide portion 4b. Is formed. Also, the ends of the upper guide plate 41 and the lower guide plate 42 in the front end guide portion 4a are cut off on both sides, and substantially match the width of the spool hole b4 of the spool 1B. It is formed in a narrow shape as shown in FIG.
この先端ガイド部 4 aと後端ガイド部 4 bの各平面がなす内側の角度 αは、前記 ガイド部材 3と同様の理由から、 1 1 0 ° ± 2 0 ° 、 より好ましくは 1 1 0 ° 士 5 ° 、 最も好ましくは 1 1 0 ° である。  The inner angle α formed by the planes of the front end guide portion 4a and the rear end guide portion 4b is 110 ° ± 20 °, more preferably 110 °, for the same reason as the guide member 3. 5 °, most preferably 110 °.
このガイド部材 4は、前述の第 1の見地におけるガイド部材 3と同様にして、 ブ ロック 2 5から突設している回動軸 2 6の取付腕 2 6 aに取り付けられる。  The guide member 4 is attached to the attachment arm 26a of the rotating shaft 26 projecting from the block 25 in the same manner as the guide member 3 in the first aspect described above.
かかるガイド部材 4を有する製造装置を用いた写真用フィルムの製造方法にお いて、ガイド部材 4をパトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3に挿入する動作は、上述した 第 1の見地におけるガイド部材 3の場合と同一であるため詳細な説明は省略する。 パトローネ 1に揷入されたガイド部材 4に対して写真フィルム Fを揷入する動 作は、 ガイド部材 4内のフィルム通路 pを通して揷入を行う。 このとき、 写真フィ ルム Fは、その上下面が上側ガイド板 4 1及び下側ガイド板 4 2によってそれぞれ 支持されるため、 挿入過程において屈撓することなく挿入され、 しかも、 フィルム 通路 Pの両側が側部ガイド部 4 3、 4 4で遮蔽されているため、写真フィルム Fの 挿入時にその両側端も支持され、写真フィルム Fのより円滑な送り動作が可能とな る。 In a method of manufacturing a photographic film using a manufacturing apparatus having the guide member 4, Since the operation of inserting the guide member 4 into the slit opening a3 of the patrone 1 is the same as the operation of the guide member 3 in the first aspect described above, detailed description is omitted. The operation of inserting the photographic film F into the guide member 4 inserted into the patrone 1 is performed through the film passage p in the guide member 4. At this time, since the upper and lower surfaces of the photographic film F are supported by the upper guide plate 41 and the lower guide plate 42, respectively, the photographic film F is inserted without bending in the insertion process, and moreover, both sides of the film path P Since the photographic film F is shielded by the side guides 43 and 44, both ends of the photographic film F are also supported when the photographic film F is inserted, so that the photographic film F can be smoothly fed.
その後、写真フィルム Fをスプール 1 Bに係止する動作、 及び、 その後にガイド 部材 4をパトローネ 1から取り出す動作についても、上述した第 1の見地における ガイド部材 3の場合と同一である。  Thereafter, the operation of locking the photographic film F to the spool 1B and the subsequent operation of removing the guide member 4 from the patrone 1 are the same as those of the guide member 3 in the first aspect described above.
なお、 このガイド部材 4では、 写真フィルム Fをスプール 1 Bに係止した後、 パ トローネ 1から取り出した際に第 1 7 ( e ) 図と同様の状態となり、 スリット口 a 3とフィルムシュート 2 2との間のフィルムパスラインを下方に V字状に屈曲さ せるが、その後はフィルムパスラインを屈曲させた状態でパトローネ 1のスプール 1 B及びフィルム送りローラ 2 2 aを回転させることで、スプール 1 Bに係止した 写真フィルム Fを巻き取り、 写真用フィルムを完成する。  In this guide member 4, after the photographic film F is locked on the spool 1B, when it is taken out of the patrone 1, the state is the same as that shown in Fig. 17 (e). The film path line between 2 and 2 is bent downward in a V-shape, and then the spool 1 B of the patrone 1 and the film feed roller 2 2 a are rotated while the film path line is bent, Take up the photographic film F locked on the spool 1B to complete the photographic film.
次に、 本発明の第 3の見地に係る写真用フィルムの製造方法について説明する。 この第 3の見地に係る製造方法を実施するために使用するのに好適な製造装置は、 前述の第 1の見地において説明した製造装置におけるガイド部材及びその周辺の 構成が異なっている。  Next, a method for producing a photographic film according to a third aspect of the present invention will be described. A manufacturing apparatus suitable for use in carrying out the manufacturing method according to the third aspect is different from the manufacturing apparatus described in the first aspect in the configuration of the guide member and the periphery thereof.
このガイド部材及びその周辺の構成を第 1 9図に示す。なお、以下の説明におい て、 第 1 3 ( a ) 図〜第 1 7 ( g ) 図と同一符号は同一構成を示している。 FIG. 19 shows the structure of the guide member and its surroundings. In the following explanation 13 (a) to 17 (g) indicate the same components.
ガイド部材 5は、前記した第 1の見地におけるガイド部材 3を 2枚用意し、所定 間隔をおいて上下に重ねたような構造を呈しており、その図示上側に位置する上側 ガイド板 5 1と図示下側に位置する下側ガイド板 5 2との間隙によってフィルム 通路 Pを形成している。  The guide member 5 has a structure in which two guide members 3 in the first aspect described above are prepared and stacked vertically at a predetermined interval, and an upper guide plate 51 located on the upper side of the drawing is provided. A film path P is formed by a gap with the lower guide plate 52 located on the lower side in the figure.
上側ガイド板 5 1及び下側ガイド板 5 2は、前述の第 1の見地におけるガイド部 材 3と同様に、それぞれ平板状の先端ガイド部 5 1 a、 5 2 aに平板状の後端ガイ ド部 5 1 b、 5 2 bが所定の角度で傾斜状に接続されており、 また、 先端ガイド部 5 1 a , 5 2 aと後端ガイド部 5 1 b、 5 2 bとの間に所定の半径を有する曲部 5 1 c、 5 2 cが設けられた略への字状をなしている。下側ガイド板 5 2の後端の図 示下面は、ブロック 2 5の長孔 2 5 a内に設けられた下側回動軸 2 7に取付腕 2 7 aを介して取り付けられると共に、上側ガイド板 5 1の後端の図示上面は、 同じく ブロック 2 5の長孔 2 5 a内に設けられた上側回動軸 2 8に取付腕 2 8 aを介し て取り付けられている。  The upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52 are, like the guide member 3 in the first aspect described above, respectively flat-shaped guide members 51a and 52a, respectively. The guides 51b and 52b are connected at a predetermined angle in an inclined manner, and between the front guides 51a and 52a and the rear guides 51b and 52b. It has a substantially rectangular shape provided with curved portions 51c and 52c having a predetermined radius. The lower surface shown at the rear end of the lower guide plate 52 is attached via a mounting arm 27a to a lower rotation shaft 27 provided in an elongated hole 25a of the block 25, and The illustrated upper surface of the rear end of the guide plate 51 is attached via an attachment arm 28a to an upper rotation shaft 28 similarly provided in the elongated hole 25a of the block 25.
上側回動軸 2 8は、円筒軸状の下側回動軸 2 7の外周面に嵌合する下向き U字状 の凹部 2 8 bを有しており、この上側回動軸 2 8が下側回動軸 2 7の外周面に嵌合 した状態で、上側ガイド板 5 1及び下側ガイド板 5 2は、その間にフィルム通路 p となる間隔をあけて重なり合うように併設されると共に、上側回動軸 2 8は下側回 動軸 2 7と同心状に一体となって回動可能となる。これによりガイド部材 5は全体 として回動可能となり、上側回動軸 2 8と下側回動軸 2 7とが長孔 2 5 a内におい て互いに離れて嵌合が解除された状態のとき、上側ガイド板 5 1と下側ガイド板 5 2とが互いに上下に分離して、 その間のフィルム通路 Pを大きく開放する。  The upper rotation shaft 28 has a downward U-shaped concave portion 28 b fitted to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical lower rotation shaft 27, and the upper rotation shaft 28 The upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52 are installed side by side so as to overlap each other with an interval corresponding to the film path p therebetween while being fitted to the outer peripheral surface of the side rotation shaft 27. The rotating shaft 28 can rotate integrally and concentrically with the lower rotating shaft 27. As a result, the guide member 5 becomes rotatable as a whole, and when the upper rotation shaft 28 and the lower rotation shaft 27 are separated from each other in the elongated hole 25a and the fitting is released, The upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52 are vertically separated from each other, and the film path P therebetween is largely opened.
次に、かかるガイド部材 5を有する製造装置を用いた写真用フィルムの製造方法 について説明する。 このガイド部材 5は、上側ガイド板 5 1と下側ガイド板 5 2と が重なり合うように併設された状態でパトローネ 1のスリット口 a 3に対する挿 入動作及び取り出し動作がなされるが、このときの挿入動作及び取り出し動作につ いては、前述した第 1の見地におけるガイド部材 3の場合と同一であるため、重複 する部分についての説明は省略し、異なる部分について第 1 4図〜第 1 8図を用い て説明する。 Next, a method for manufacturing a photographic film using a manufacturing apparatus having the guide member 5 will be described. Will be described. The guide member 5 performs insertion and removal operations with respect to the slit a3 of the patrone 1 in a state where the upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52 are juxtaposed so as to overlap with each other. Since the inserting operation and the removing operation are the same as the case of the guide member 3 in the first aspect described above, the description of the overlapping portions is omitted, and the different portions are shown in FIGS. 14 to 18. This will be described with reference to FIG.
ガイド部材 5は、下側回動軸 2 7に上側回動軸 2 8が嵌合した状態、即ち上側ガ ィド板 5 1と下側ガイド板 5 2とがその間にフィルム通路 pをあけて重なり合う ように併設された状態で、前述した第 1の見地の場合と同様の操作により、その先 端ガイド部 5 1 a、 5 2 aの先端がスプール孔 b 4に接近するように、パトローネ ホルダ一 2 9にセットされているパトローネ 1のスリツトロ a 3に挿入される(第 2 0 ( a ) 図参照) 。  The guide member 5 is in a state in which the upper rotation shaft 28 is fitted to the lower rotation shaft 27, that is, the upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52 have a film path p therebetween. In a state where the cartridges are overlapped, the cartridge holder is operated by the same operation as in the case of the first viewpoint described above so that the leading ends of the leading end guide portions 51a and 52a approach the spool hole b4. It is inserted into slitro a3 of patrone 1 which is set to one 29 (see FIG. 20 (a)).
次いで、前進したフィルムシュート 2 2を通して写真フィルム Fを送り出す。 こ こで、 フィルムシュート 2 2の先端から送り出された写真フィルム Fは、パトロー ネ 1のスリット口 a 3に揷入された上記ガイド部材 5に形成されているフィルム 通路 Pを通ってスリットロ a 3内に挿入される。 このとき写真フィルム Fは、上側 ガイド板 5 1及び下側ガイド板 5 2によってその上下面がそれぞれ支持されるた め、挿入過程において屈撓することなく円滑にスプール 1 Bのスプール孔 b 4まで 案内され、 係止されるようになる (第 2 0 ( b ) 図参照) 。  Next, the photographic film F is sent out through the advancing film chute 22. Here, the photographic film F sent out from the tip of the film chute 2 2 passes through the film passage P formed in the guide member 5 inserted into the slit opening a 3 of the cartridge 1, and the slit film a 3 Is inserted into. At this time, since the upper and lower surfaces of the photographic film F are supported by the upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52, respectively, the photographic film F can smoothly reach the spool hole b4 of the spool 1B without bending during the insertion process. It is guided and locked (see Fig. 20 (b)).
次いで、 ブロック 9が後退を開始し、前述した第 1の見地の場合と同様にしてガ ィド部材 5を引き出しと回転とを行いながら、パト口一ネ 1から取り出す(第 2 0 ( c ) 図参照) 。 このとき写真フィルム Fは、 上記の場合と同様に、 スリット口 a 3とフィルムシュート 2 2との間のフィルムパスラインを下方に V字状に屈曲さ せるが、ガイド部材 5がパトローネ 1外へ取り出されると、上側回動軸 2 8は下側 回動軸 2 7から分離し、 ブロック 2 5の長孔 2 5 aに沿って上昇する。 これ より ガイド部材 5の上側ガイド板 5 1は下側ガイド板 5 2から分離し、その間のフィル ム通路 pが上側に大きく開放し、写真フィルム Fのパスラインは直線状となる (第 2 0 ( d ) 図、 第 2 0 ( e ) 図参照) 。 Next, the block 9 starts retreating, and the guide member 5 is pulled out and rotated in the same manner as in the case of the first aspect described above, and the guide member 5 is taken out from the gate 1 (20 (c)). See figure). At this time, the photographic film F is bent downward in a V-shape along the film path line between the slit opening a3 and the film chute 22 as in the above case. However, when the guide member 5 is taken out of the patrone 1, the upper rotation shaft 28 is separated from the lower rotation shaft 27 and rises along the long hole 25a of the block 25. As a result, the upper guide plate 51 of the guide member 5 is separated from the lower guide plate 52, and the film passage p therebetween is largely opened upward, and the pass line of the photographic film F becomes straight (20th line). (See Fig. (d) and Fig. 20 (e).)
次いで、パトローネ 1のスプール 1 B及びフィルム送りローラ 2 2 aを回転させ ることで、 スプール 1 Bに係止した写真フィルム Fを巻き取り、写真用フィルムを 完成する。 このとき、 ガイド部材 5はパトローネ 1から取り出され、その上側ガイ ド板 5 1がフィルムパスライン上から退避してフィルム通路 pを大きく開放して いるため、巻き取り時に写真フィルム Fがガイド部材 5と接触することはなく、写 真フィルム Fに傷等が発生する心配はない。  Next, the photographic film F locked on the spool 1B is wound up by rotating the spool 1B of the patrone 1 and the film feed roller 22a to complete the photographic film. At this time, the guide member 5 is taken out of the patrone 1 and the upper guide plate 51 is retracted from the film path line to open the film path p greatly. There is no risk of scratching the photo film F.
なお、 この第 3の見地におけるガイド部材 5の他の実施形態を第 2 1図に示す。 同図は上記ガイド部材 5と異なる下側ガイド板 5 2のみを示しており、この下側ガ ィド板 5 2の両側端にはフィルム通路 p側に向けて立設する側部ガイド部 5 3、 5 4が形成されている。 この側部ガイド部 5 3、 5 4は、第 1 9図に示す上側ガイド 板 5 1をフィルム通路 pをおいて重ね合わせた際に該フィルム通路 pの両側を覆 うように形成されている。 これにより、前述の第 2の見地におけるガイド部材 4と 同様に、上側ガイド板 5 1と下側ガイド板 5 2とによって写真フィルムを揷入する 際の屈撓を防止すると同時に、側部ガイド部 5 3、 5 4によって写真フィルム揷入 時の両側端を支持して横方向のガイドをなし、より円滑な送り動作が可能となるが、 このガイド部材 5によれば、上側ガイド板 5 1と下側ガイド板 5 2とが分離可能で あるため、第 2の見地におけるガイド部材 4とは異なり、 ガイド部材 4の取り出し 後のフィルムパスラインを直線状にした状態で巻き取りが可能であり、第 2の見地 に比べて写真フィルムを傷めるおそれは少ない。 Another embodiment of the guide member 5 in the third aspect is shown in FIG. The drawing shows only a lower guide plate 52 different from the above guide member 5, and both side ends of the lower guide plate 52 have side guide portions 5 standing up toward the film passage p side. 3, 5 and 4 are formed. The side guide portions 53 and 54 are formed so as to cover both sides of the film passage p when the upper guide plate 51 shown in FIG. 19 is overlapped with the film passage p. . This prevents the upper guide plate 51 and the lower guide plate 52 from bending when the photographic film is inserted, as well as the side guide portion, similarly to the guide member 4 in the second aspect described above. 5 3 and 5 4 support the both ends when the photographic film is inserted to form a lateral guide, enabling smoother feeding operation. According to this guide member 5, the upper guide plate 5 1 Since the lower guide plate 52 can be separated from the guide member 4, unlike the guide member 4 in the second aspect, the film can be wound up with the film path line after the guide member 4 is taken out in a straight line, Second point of view The risk of damaging the photographic film is smaller than that of the photographic film.
側部ガイド部 5 3、 5 4は、 図示する形態に限らず、 ガイド部材 5の上側ガイド 板 5 1側に設けられていてもよく、 また、例えば一方の側部ガイド部 5 3を上側ガ ィド板 5 1に、他方の側部ガイド部 5 4を下側ガイド板 5 2にそれぞれ分けて設け るようにしてもよい。  The side guide portions 53 and 54 are not limited to the illustrated form, and may be provided on the upper guide plate 51 side of the guide member 5. For example, one side guide portion 53 may be provided on the upper guide plate. The guide plate 51 may be provided with the other side guide portion 54 separately on the lower guide plate 52.
なお、 かかる側部ガイド部は、 図示しないが、 前記した第 1の見地におけるガイ ド部材 3に、写真フィルムが当接する側(図示下側) に向けて立設するように形成 してもよく、 これにより第 1の見地においても、写真フィルム挿入時にその両側端 を支持して横方向のガイドをなすことで、より円滑な送り動作をなすようにするこ ともできる。  Although not shown, the side guide portion may be formed so as to stand on the guide member 3 in the first aspect described above so as to face the side (the lower side in the figure) where the photographic film is in contact. Thus, even in the first aspect, when the photographic film is inserted, the both sides are supported and a lateral guide is formed, so that a smoother feeding operation can be performed.
以上説明した本発明の各見地では、パ卜ローネ 1の向きは、スリット口 a 3が上 方に位置するようにセットされるようにしたが、スリット口 a 3が下方に位置する ようにパトローネホルダー 2 1にセットされるようにしてもよい。 この場合、ガイ ド部材 3、 4、 5も図示の態様と上下反対に配置され、 その回動動作も反対に動作 されることはもちろんである。  In each of the aspects of the present invention described above, the orientation of the cartridge 1 is set so that the slit a3 is positioned upward, but the cartridge is set so that the slit a3 is positioned downward. The holder 21 may be set. In this case, the guide members 3, 4, and 5 are also arranged upside down as shown in the figure, and the rotation of the guides 3, 4 and 5 is also reversed.
また、以上説明した本発明の各見地は、新規な写真用フィルムを製造する場合に 限らない。即ち、 スプールを内蔵し、 両側がキャップで遮蔽された状態の写真用パ トローネであれば、使用済みのパ卜ローネの他、生産ロス品や期限切れにより回収 されたパトローネに対しても同様に適用でき、これによりパトローネの再利用を図 ることも可能である。 この場合、スプールに係止されてパト口一ネ内に残存するフ イルムは、 スプールから引きちぎる等により排除しておき、 その後、 上記方法を適 用すればよい。  Further, the aspects of the present invention described above are not limited to the case where a novel photographic film is manufactured. In other words, if the photo cartridge has a built-in spool and both sides are covered with caps, the same applies to used cartridges as well as lost cartridges and cartridges collected due to expiration. It is possible to reuse the patrone. In this case, the film retained by the spool and remaining in the opening of the patrol opening is removed by tearing off the spool or the like, and then the above method may be applied.
以下、本発明の第 3の目的を達成するための実施の形態について図面に基づいて 説明する。 Hereinafter, an embodiment for achieving the third object of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. explain.
まず、 パトローネの構成の一例について説明する。  First, an example of the configuration of the patrone will be described.
第 2 2図は、 1 3 5型の写真用パトローネの外観構成を示す斜視図、第 2 3 ( a ) 図はパト口一ネ内に収容されているスプールの斜視図、 第 2 3 ( b ) 図はスプール の中央断面図である。  FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing an external configuration of a 135 type photographic patrone, FIG. 23 (a) is a perspective view of a spool housed in the pat opening, and FIG. The figure is a central sectional view of the spool.
パトローネ 2 0 1は、金属薄板を用いて円筒状に形成されたパトローネ本体 2 1 0内にスプール 2 0 2を収容し、その両側部にそれぞれキャップ 2 1 1、 2 1 1を かしめ固定して構成されている。各キャップ 2 1 1には中心に開口 2 1 1 aが形成 され、 スプール 2 0 2の両端の各ハブ 2 2 3 a , 2 2 3 bを支承することで、 ノ ト ローネ本体 2 1 0内においてスプール 2 0 2を回転可能に収容している。  The patrone 201 accommodates a spool 202 in a patrone body 210 formed in a cylindrical shape using a thin metal plate, and caulks and fixes caps 211 and 211 on both sides thereof. It is configured. An opening 211a is formed in the center of each cap 211, and the hubs 223a and 223b at both ends of the spool 202 are supported to form the inside of the notrone body 210. , The spool 202 is rotatably accommodated.
パトローネ本体 2 1 0は、円筒状に丸められた金属薄板の両端が周方向に延出さ れ、その両薄板間に形成される隙間がフィルム Fを出し入れする際のスリットロ 2 1 2となり、このスリット口 2 1 2に遮光性を持たせるためのテレンプ 2 1 3が設 けられている。  In the patrone main body 210, both ends of a metal thin plate rolled into a cylindrical shape extend in the circumferential direction, and a gap formed between the two thin plates serves as a slit roll 212 when the film F is taken in and out. A mouthpiece 21 3 is provided for the mouth 2 12 to have a light-shielding property.
スプール 2 0 2は、フィルムを巻き取る巻取り軸 2 2 1の両端にそれぞれフラン ジ 2 2 2、 2 2 2が、更にその外側にそれぞれ長ハブ 2 2 3 a及び短ハブ 2 2 3 b が同心状に設けられている。卷取り軸 2 2 1には、 フィルム尾端が挿入されるスリ ット孔 2 2 4が形成され、そのスリット孔 2 2 4内には係止爪 2 2 5と押えリブ 2 2 6とが設けられている。  The spool 202 has flanges 222, 222 at both ends of a winding shaft 222 for winding the film, and a long hub 2223a and a short hub 2223b outside thereof. It is provided concentrically. A slit hole 2 24 for inserting the tail end of the film is formed in the winding shaft 2 21, and a locking claw 2 25 and a holding rib 2 2 6 are formed in the slit hole 2 24. Is provided.
第 2 3 ( a ) 図, 第 2 3 (b ) 図に示す態様では、 係止爪 2 2 5はスリット孔 2 2 4内において所定間隔をもって 2つ設けられ、押えリブ 2 2 6は 1つだけ設けら れている。各係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5と押えリブ 2 2 6とは、 スリット孔 2 2 4内に おいて互いに対向状に配置され、且つ押えリブ 2 2 6が各係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5の 0307144 In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), two locking claws 2 25 are provided at predetermined intervals in the slit hole 2 24, and one holding rib 2 26 is provided. Only provided. The locking claws 2 2 5 and 2 2 5 and the holding rib 2 2 6 are arranged opposite to each other in the slit hole 2 24, and the holding rib 2 2 6 is attached to each locking claw 2 2 5 The 2 2 5 0307144
41 間に位置するように設けられている。 また、 係止爪 225, 225と押えリブ 22 6とは、 第 23 (b) 図に示すように、 側面から見て互いにオーバーラップするよ うにその突出高さが設定されると共に、 それぞれフィルム揷入側の側面 225 a, 226 aがテーパー状に形成され、スリット孔 224に挿入されたフィルム尾端を 各係止爪 225, 225と押えリブ 226との間に円滑に案内するようになってい る。  41. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the protrusion heights of the locking claws 225, 225 and the holding rib 226 are set so as to overlap each other when viewed from the side, and each of the film claws 225, 225 has a film height. The entry side surfaces 225a, 226a are formed in a tapered shape so that the tail end of the film inserted into the slit hole 224 is smoothly guided between the locking claws 225, 225 and the holding rib 226. You.
なお、 このスプール 202とフィルム尾端との係止構造は、例えばメーカ一の違 いや品種の違い等のパト口一ネの種類によって上記態様と異なる。 即ち、 第 24 (a) 図に示す態様では、スリッ卜孔 224にフィルム係止用の係止爪 225が 1 つだけ設けられており、この係止爪 225に係止されたフィルム尾端を押え付ける ための 2つの押えリブ 226, 226が上記係止爪 225を間に挟むように該係止 爪 225と対向状に設けられている。 また、 第 24 (b) 図に示す態様では、 係止 爪 225の数は第 23 (a) 図, 第 23 (b) 図と同様に 2つ設けられているが、 各係止爪 225, 225と対向状に配置される押えリブ 226が、該係止爪 225、 225間において 2つ設けられている。  The structure for locking the spool 202 and the tail end of the film differs from the above-described embodiment depending on the type of the patrol port, such as a difference in manufacturer or a type. That is, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 24 (a), only one locking claw 225 for locking the film is provided in the slit hole 224, and the tail end of the film locked by the locking claw 225 is fixed to the slit. Two pressing ribs 226, 226 for pressing are provided to face the locking claw 225 so as to sandwich the locking claw 225 therebetween. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 24 (b), the number of the locking claws 225 is two, as in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). Two pressing ribs 226 are provided between the locking claws 225 and 225 so as to face the 225.
この他、係止爪 225や押えリブ 226の数が同一でも、係止爪 225や押えリ ブ 226がそれぞれ配置される間隔が異なる場合もある。  In addition, even if the numbers of the locking claws 225 and the holding ribs 226 are the same, the intervals at which the locking claws 225 and the holding ribs 226 are arranged may be different.
一方、 フィルムは、スプール 202のスプール孔 224に揷入されるフィルム尾 端 F a側が第 2 5図に示すように両サイドの切り落とされた幅狭状に形成されて いる。 このフィルム尾端 F aが第 23 (a) 図, 第 23 (b) 図に示す態様のスプ —ルに係止される場合について説明すると、 フィルム尾端 F aには、上記スプール 孔 224内の各係止爪 225、 225と係止するための 2つの係止孔 Fb、 Fbが 開設されている。 この各係止孔 Fb、 Fbがスプール 202の各係止爪 225、 2 2 5と係合することで、 フィルム尾端 F aがスプール 2 0 2に係止される。スリツ ト孔 2 2 4内の押えリブ 2 2 6は、このようにフィルム尾端 F aがスプール 2 0 2 に係止された状態で、各該係止爪 2 2 5 , 2 2 5間のフィルム尾端 F aを該係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5側に向けて押え付け、 フィルム尾端 F aが係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5力、 ら不用意に外れてしまうことを防止している。 On the other hand, the film is formed in a narrow shape in which the film tail end Fa side inserted into the spool hole 224 of the spool 202 is cut off on both sides as shown in FIG. The case where the film tail end Fa is locked to the spool shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b) will be described. Two locking holes Fb, Fb for locking with the respective locking claws 225, 225 are provided. Each of the locking holes Fb, Fb corresponds to each of the locking claws 225, 2 of the spool 202. By engaging with 25, the film tail end Fa is locked to the spool 202. The holding ribs 2 26 in the slit holes 2 24 are positioned between the respective locking claws 2 25, 2 25 with the film tail end Fa locked to the spool 202 in this manner. The film tail end Fa is pressed toward the locking claws 2 25 and 2 25, and the film tail end Fa is accidentally disengaged from the locking claws 2 25 and 2 25. Has been prevented.
使用済みのパトローネ 2 0 1は、フィルム尾端 F aがスプール 2 0 2に係止され ている状態でスリット口 2 1 2の近傍で切り落とされ、そのフィルム尾端 F aの一 部がスリットロ 2 1 2から出ている状態にある。本発明では、 この状態のパトロー ネ 2 0 1から、 スプール 2 0 2に係止されているフィルム (以下、 これを旧フィル ムという。) を、 パトローネ 2 0 1を全く分解することなく取り外し、 スプール 2 0 2に新たな未露光のフィルム (以下、 これを新フィルムという。 ) を係止するこ とで、 パト口一ネ 2 0 1の再使用を図るものである。  The used patrone 201 is cut off in the vicinity of the slit opening 212 while the film tail end Fa is locked on the spool 202, and a part of the film tail end Fa is cut into the slit slot 210. You are out of 1 2 In the present invention, the film (hereinafter, referred to as an old film) locked on the spool 202 is removed from the patrone 201 in this state without disassembling the patrone 201 at all. By locking a new unexposed film (hereinafter, referred to as a new film) on the spool 202, it is possible to reuse the pato mouth 201.
なお、 本明細書における旧フィルムは、 一旦使用 (撮影) されたフィルムに限ら ず、フィルム付きパトローネの製造過程において生じた生産ロス品や店頭等におい て期限切れとなった期限切れ品を回収した際のパトローネに係止されている未使 用のフィルムをも含む。従って、以下の説明において使用済みのパト口一ネという ときは、 フィルムが一旦使用されたものに限らず、未使用のフィルムが係止されて いる生産ロス品や期限切れ品をも含む。  The old film used in this specification is not limited to film that has been used (photographed), but may also be used for the collection of lost products produced during the manufacturing process of patrones with film or expired products that have expired at stores. Includes unused film locked in the patrone. Therefore, in the following description, the term "used pato mouth" refers to not only a used film but also a production loss product or an expired product in which an unused film is locked.
次に、本発明に係る写真用パト口一ネの再使用方法の実施形態について、第 2 6 図を用いて説明する。  Next, an embodiment of a method for reusing a photographic door opening according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
まず、種類判別工程 1 5 0では、 旧フィルムの尾端の一部のみが第 2 2図に示す ようにスリット口 2 1 2から出ている状態の使用済みのパトローネ 2 0 1に対し てパトローネ 2 0 1の種類の判別を行う。 ここで判別されるパトローネ 2 0 1の種類とは、主としてパト口一ネ 2 0 1のメ 一力一である。 これは、 スプール 2 0 2とフィルムとの係止構造がメーカー毎に異 なるため、メ一力一毎に適した旧フィルムの取り外し及び係止を行うようにするた めである。 この他、 パトローネ 2 0 1の品種を判別するようにしてもよい。 First, in the type discriminating step 150, the used patrone 201 with only a part of the tail end of the old film coming out of the slit opening 212 as shown in FIG. The type of 201 is determined. The type of the patrone 201 determined here is mainly the strength of the patrol mouth 201. This is because the structure for locking the spool 202 and the film differs depending on the manufacturer, so that the removal and locking of the old film suitable for each machine can be performed. In addition, the type of the patrone 201 may be determined.
このようなパト口一ネ 2 0 1の種類の判別は、パトロ一ネ 2 0 1の表面に記録さ れている D Xバーコ一ド (メーカ一、 品種等) 、 メーカー独自のコード、 意匠等を 読み取ることによって行われる。 また、 ノ\°トローネ 2 0 1にリユース (再使用) 回 数が記録されている場合には、ここでこのリュース回数を読み取るようにすること で、 リユース回数の多いパトローネをこの段階で排出するようにしてもよい。 これらの判別を行うための具体的な種類判別手段としては、パト口一ネ 2 0 1か らバーコ一ド等のコ一ドを読み取るためのコードリーダ一等の読み取り装置、パト 口一ネ 2 0 1の外観をテレビカメラ等を用いて光学的に観察することによりその 意匠を画像認識し、予め記憶しておいた画像と比較して種類の判別を行うための画 像認識装置等、パトローネ 2 0 1表面に対する記録態様に応じた適宜の手段を用い ることができる。  The discrimination of the type of the patrol mouth 201 can be made by using the DX bar code (manufacturer, variety, etc.) recorded on the surface of the patron 201, the manufacturer's unique code, design, etc. This is done by reading. In addition, if the number of reuses (reuse) times is recorded in the No. ロ ー ネ ネ ネ ネ ネ ネ ネ 0 0 1 1 1 リ ュ ー リ ュ ー リ ュ ー リ ュ ー こ と パ リ ュ ー こ と パ. You may do so. As a specific type discriminating means for performing these discriminations, a reading device such as a code reader for reading a code such as a bar code from the patrol port 201 and a patrol port 2 can be used. A patrone such as an image recognition device or the like for recognizing the design by optically observing the appearance of 01 using a television camera or the like and comparing the type with a previously stored image. Appropriate means according to the recording mode for the 201 surface can be used.
これらの手段によりパト口一ネ 2 0 1の種類が判別されると、その種類に応じた スプール 2 0 2とフィルムとの係止構造が判明する。従って、後工程においてパト 口一ネ 2 0 1から旧フィルムの尾端を取り外す際及び新フィルムを係止する際、パ トローネ 2 0 1の種類に応じた最も適した治具を選択することが可能となる。 種類の判別が行われたパトローネ 2 0 1は、次の検査工程 2 5 0において検査が 行われる。本発明において、 旧フィルムの取り外し及び新フィルムの係止のために は、スプール 2 0 2に係止されている旧フィルムの尾端の一部がパト口一ネ 2 0 1 のスリット口 2 1 2から出ている必要がある。従って、 ここで、 旧フィルムの尾端 の一部がパトローネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2から出ているか否かの検査を行う ことが好ましい。 When the type of the opening 201 is determined by these means, the locking structure between the spool 202 and the film according to the type is determined. Therefore, when removing the tail end of the old film from the patrol opening 201 and locking the new film in the subsequent process, it is necessary to select the most suitable jig according to the type of the patrone 201. It becomes possible. The patrone 201 whose type has been determined is inspected in the next inspection step 250. In the present invention, in order to remove the old film and lock the new film, a part of the tail end of the old film locked on the spool 202 is formed by the slit opening 21 of the opening 21 1. Must be out of 2. So here, the tail end of the old film It is preferable to perform an inspection as to whether or not a part of the cartridge comes out of the slit opening 212 of the patrone 201.
パト口一ネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2から旧フィルムの尾端の一部が出ている か否かを検査するための検査手段としては、光電センサを用いると、検査の自動化 が可能である。  Automated inspection is possible by using a photoelectric sensor as an inspection means for inspecting whether a part of the tail end of the old film is protruding from the slit opening 2 1 2 of the opening 21 2 It is.
ここでは、パトローネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2から出ている旧フィルムの尾端 の一部がパトローネ 2 0 1内に入り込んでしまうことのないように、フィルムがパ トローネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2から出る方向にスプール 2 0 2を回転させた 後、スプール 2 0 2の位相をロックするスプール位相ロック手段等の適宜の手段を 講じることが好ましい。  Here, the film is cut into the patrone 201 so that a part of the tail end of the old film coming out of the patrone 201 slit opening 212 does not enter the patrone 201. After rotating the spool 202 in the direction of exiting the port 212, it is preferable to take appropriate means such as a spool phase locking means for locking the phase of the spool 202.
また、 ここでの検查は、 上記の他に、画像認識処理によりパト口一ネ 2 0 1表面 の汚れ (ゴミ付着、 鲭び) の検査や、 スリット口 2 1 2やキャップ 2 1 1、 パト口 ーネ本体 2 1 0の変形検査を行うようにすることも好ましレ^また、遮光状況の検 査ゃパト口一ネ高さ検査、 スプール ·キャップクリアランス検査、 C A S検出検査 等を行うことも好ましい。  In addition, in addition to the above, the inspection at this time includes inspection of dirt (dust adhesion, cracks) on the surface of the pachinko mouth 201 by image recognition processing, and the slit mouth 211 and cap 211, It is also preferable to carry out a deformation inspection of the plastic mouth body 210, and also to perform a light-shielding condition inspection, a plastic mouth height inspection, a spool / cap clearance inspection, a CAS detection inspection, etc. It is also preferred.
なお、かかる検査は、前記種類判別工程 1 5 0における種類判別と同時に行うよ うにしてもよい。  This inspection may be performed simultaneously with the type determination in the type determination step 150.
検查において合格とされたパト口一ネ 2 0 1は、次いで、スプール 2 0 2に係止 されている旧フィルムの尾端を分離するが、 この分離に先立ち、複数種のパトロー ネ 2 0 1を処理する場合、スプール 2 0 2とフィルム尾端との各係止構造に適した 治具を選択することが好ましい。即ち、最初の種類判別工程 1 5 0において判別さ れた種類、 即ち、 係止爪 2 2 5と押えリブ 2 2 6の構造が例えば第 2 3 ( a ) 図〜 第 2 3 (b ) 図、 第 2 4 ( a) 図〜第 2 4 ( b ) 図にそれぞれ示す態様のどれに該 当するかによって旧フィルムの尾端をスプール 2 0 2から取り外すために最適な 治具の構成は自ずと異なってくる。 このため、 次の治具選択工程 3 5 0では、 種類 判別工程 1 5 0において判別されたパトローネ 2 0 Γの種類に応じて、旧フィルム の尾端をスプール 2 0 2から分離すると共に新フィルムをスプール 2 0 2に係止 するための治具を選択する。 The patrol mouth 201 passed in the inspection then separates the tail end of the old film locked on the spool 202. Prior to this separation, a plurality of types of patrol cartridges 201 are separated. When processing 1, it is preferable to select a jig suitable for each locking structure between the spool 202 and the tail end of the film. That is, the types determined in the first type determination step 150, that is, the structures of the locking claws 2 25 and the holding ribs 2 26 are, for example, shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (b). Figure 24 (a) to Figure 24 (b) The optimal jig configuration for removing the tail end of the old film from the spool 202 will naturally differ depending on whether it hits. For this reason, in the next jig selection step 350, the tail end of the old film is separated from the spool 202 and the new film is separated according to the type of the patrone 20Γ determined in the type determination step 150. Select the jig for locking the to the spool 202.
次のフィルム分離工程 4 5 0では、上記治具を用いてパトローネ 2 0 1から旧フ ィルムを取り外す工程である。  The next film separation step 450 is a step of removing the old film from the patrone 201 using the above jig.
このフィルム分離工程 4 5 0においてパトローネ 2 0 1から旧フィルムを取り 外すために用いられる分離手段の一例を第 2 7図に示す。 図中、 3 5 1はパト口一 ネ 2 0 1を保持するパトローネホルダーである。パト口一ネ 2 0 1は、 このパ卜ロ —ネホルダー 3 5 1に保持された状態で、そのスリット口 2 1 2から出ている旧フ イルムの尾端 F 1 aに形成されているパ一フォレーシヨン F 1 cに、尾端引張部材 3 5 2の 2つの係止爪 3 5 2 a , 3 5 2 aが係止されるようにセットされる。 上記パトローネホルダー 3 5 1に保持されたパトローネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2に一端が臨むように、新フィルムを上記パトローネ 2 0 1に対して供給するた めのフィルムシュート 3 5 3が配設されると共に、このフィルムシュート 3 5 3に ガイドレール 3 5 4が並設されている。ガイドレール 3 5 4にはスライド部材 3 5 5がスライド可能に設けられ、このスライド部材 3 5 5には上記フィルムシュート 3 5 3の上面に亘つて配置される腕部 3 5 5 aが設けられており、上記尾端引張部 材 3 5 2はこの腕部 3 5 5 aの下面に取り付けられている。  FIG. 27 shows an example of a separating means used for removing the old film from the patrone 201 in the film separating step 450. In the figure, reference numeral 351 denotes a patrone holder for holding the pat mouth 201. The pocket 201 is held in the cartridge holder 351, and is formed at the tail end F1a of the old film coming out of the slit 21-2. The two locking claws 3 52 a and 35 2 a of the tail end pulling member 35 2 are set to be locked in one foration F 1 c. A film chute 3553 for supplying a new film to the patrone 201 is arranged so that one end faces the slit 211 of the patrone 201 held in the patrone holder 351. At the same time, a guide rail 354 is provided in parallel with the film chute 353. A slide member 365 is slidably provided on the guide rail 355, and the slide member 355 is provided with an arm 355a disposed over the upper surface of the film chute 355. The tail end pulling member 352 is attached to the lower surface of the arm portion 35a.
また、上記ガイドレール 3 5 4には、 もう一つのスライド部材 3 5 6がスライド 可能に設けられている。このスライド部材 3 5 6には上記フィルムシュ一卜 3 5 3 の上面に亘つて配置される腕部 3 5 6 aが設けられており、この腕部 3 5 6 aの下 面に上記パト口一ネ 2 0 1に向けて延びる分離係止用治具 3 5 7が取り付けられ ている。 The guide rail 354 is provided with another slide member 356 so as to be slidable. The slide member 356 has an arm 356a disposed over the upper surface of the film shoot 353, and is provided below the arm 356a. A separating and locking jig 357 extending toward the above-mentioned gate opening 201 is attached to the surface.
分離係止用治具 3 5 7はフィルムとほぼ同幅に形成された薄板状に形成されて おり、その先端は、パトローネホルダー 3 5 1に保持されているパトローネ 2 0 1 のスリット口 2 1 2近傍まで延びると共に、上記尾端引張部材 3 5 2と上記フィル ムシユート 3 5 3との間に挿入されるように配置されている。  The separation and locking jig 357 is formed in a thin plate shape having substantially the same width as the film, and the tip thereof has a slit 21 2 of the patrone 201 held by the patrone holder 35 1. 2, and is disposed so as to be inserted between the tail end pulling member 352 and the film shroud 353.
この分離係止用治具 3 5 7の一例を第 2 8図に示す。分離係止用治具 3 5 7の先 端 3 5 7 aは、両サイドの切り落とされた幅狭状に形成されている。分離係止用治 具 3 5 7は、 この先端 3 5 7 aが少なくとも曲げ弾性を有しており、例えば 0 . 3 mm厚の P E T樹脂シートを用いて形成される。  An example of the separation and locking jig 357 is shown in FIG. The leading end 357 a of the separation locking jig 357 is formed in a narrow shape with both sides cut off. The separating and locking jig 357 has a distal end 357a having at least bending elasticity, and is formed using, for example, a 0.3 mm thick PET resin sheet.
先端 3 5 7 aの端部は、 第 2 3 ( a ) 図, 第 2 3 ( b ) 図に示すスプール 2 0 2 のスリット孔 2 2 4に形成されている係止爪 2 2 5 , 2 2 5の数に対応させて 2つ に分かれている。 この態様では、先端 3 5 7 aに三角形状の切り込み 3 5 7 bを設 け、その切り込み 3 5 7 bの最深部に所定長さで線状にスリット 3 5 7 cを形成し て端部を 2つに分割している。  The end of the tip 357 a is formed by a locking claw 2 25, 2 formed in a slit hole 2 24 of the spool 202 shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). It is divided into two according to the number of 25. In this embodiment, a triangular notch 3557b is formed at the tip 3557a, and a slit 3557c is formed linearly with a predetermined length at the deepest portion of the notch 3557b to form an end. Is divided into two.
分離係止用治具 3 5 7の先端 3 5 7 aは、後述するように、スプール 2 0 2のス リット孔 2 2 4内に挿入された時に、該スリット孔 2 2 4内の係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5を破壌せず、なお且つスプール 2 0 2に係止されているフィルム尾端 F 1 aに押 し負けない必要がある。 従って、 分離係止用治具 3 5 7の先端 3 5 7 aの剛性は、 スプール樹脂の剛性より小さく、 且つフィルムの剛性よりも大きい。  When inserted into the slit hole 222 of the spool 202, the distal end 357a of the separating / locking jig 357, as described later, locks the slit hole 224 in the slit hole 224. It is necessary that the claws 2 25 and 2 25 do not rupture and that they do not push against the film tail end F 1 a locked on the spool 202. Therefore, the rigidity of the tip 357a of the separation locking jig 3557 is smaller than the rigidity of the spool resin and larger than the rigidity of the film.
なお、第 2 7図において、 3 5 8はフィルムシュート 3 5 3内の新フィルムをパ トローネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2に向けて移送するための送りローラ、 3 5 9は パトローネ 2 0 1から取り外された旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aを吸着させて排出す るための尾端吸着排出用吸盤であり、 この尾端吸着排出用吸盤 3 5 9は、 フィルム シュート 3 5 3上面において昇降可能であると共に、該上面と上面から外れる位置 との間で移動可能とされる。 In FIG. 27, reference numeral 358 denotes a feed roller for transferring a new film in the film chute 353 toward the slit 211 of the cartridge 201, and reference numeral 359 denotes a cartridge. Attach and discharge tail edge F 1 a of old film removed from 1 The suction cup for suction and discharge at the tail end is capable of moving up and down on the upper surface of the film chute and moving between the upper surface and a position off the upper surface. It is said.
次に、 この作用について説明する。 まず、 使用済みのパト口一ネ 2 0 1をパト口 ーネホルダー 3 5 1に保持し、そのスリットロ 2 1 2から出ている旧フィルムの尾 端 F 1 aのパ一フォレーシヨン F 1 cを尾端引張部材 3 5 2の各係止爪 3 5 2 a , 3 5 2 aに係止させてセットする。 ここで、尾端引張部材 3 5 2をパトローネ 2 0 1から引き離す方向にスライド部材 3 5 5を若干移動させることで、尾端 F 1 aに ある程度の張力を掛けておく。 なお、 この状態では、 スプール 2 0 2内の各係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5は、 スリット孔 2 2 4において旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aの下面側か ら該尾端 F 1 aを係止している。  Next, this operation will be described. First, hold the used pat mouth 201 in the pat mouth holder 351, and attach the front end F1a of the old film F1a that comes out of the slit slot 211 to the tail end. The tension member 35 52 is set by being locked to each of the locking claws 35 52 a, 35 52 a. Here, a certain amount of tension is applied to the tail end F 1 a by slightly moving the slide member 35 5 in a direction in which the tail end pulling member 35 2 is separated from the patrone 201. In this state, each of the locking claws 2 25, 2 25 in the spool 202 is moved from the lower surface side of the tail end F 1 a of the old film to the tail end F 1 a in the slit hole 222. Is locked.
次いで、スライド部材 3 5 6をスライドさせ、分離係止用治具 3 5 7をパトロー ネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2に向けて移動させる (第 2 9図) 。 この移動により、 分離係止用治具 3 5 7の先端 3 5 7 aは、 第 3 0 ( a ) 図に示すように、 スリット 口 2 1 2からスプール 2 0 2のスリット孔 2 2 4に対し、旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 a と各係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5との間に挿入される。 このとき、分離係止用治具 3 5 7 の先端 3 5 7 aは、ノ\°トローネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2からスプール 2 0 2のス リット孔 2 2 4まで、尾端引張部材 3 5 2によって張力が掛けられている旧フィル ムの尾端 F 1 aに案内されながら、その曲げ弾性によってフィルム尾端 F 1 aに沿 つて円滑に揷入される。  Next, the slide member 356 is slid, and the separation / locking jig 357 is moved toward the slit 211 of the cartridge 201 (FIG. 29). By this movement, the tip 357 a of the separation and locking jig 3557 is moved from the slit opening 21 2 to the slit hole 2 24 of the spool 202 as shown in FIG. 30 (a). On the other hand, it is inserted between the tail end F 1 a of the old film and each of the locking claws 2 25, 2 25. At this time, the tip 357 a of the jig for separation and locking 3.57 a is pulled from the slit opening 2 1 2 of the nozzle 200 to the slit hole 2 2 4 of the spool 202 by pulling the tail end. While being guided by the tail end F1a of the old film, which is tensioned by the member 352, the bending elasticity allows it to be smoothly inserted along the film tail end F1a.
分離係止用治具 3 5 7の先端 3 5 7 aが各係止爪 2 2 5 , 2 2 5のテーパー面ま で到達する直前に、第 3 1図に示すように、それまで旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aに掛 けていた張力を 0にし、または旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aをパトローネ 2 0 1側に若 干押し戻すようにすることで、該尾端 F 1 aの係止孔 F b、 F bが各係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5から外れ易い状態にしておく。 Immediately before the tip 357 a of the separation locking jig 357 reaches the tapered surface of each locking claw 2 25, 2 25, as shown in Fig. 31, the old film Set the tension applied to the tail end F1a of the film to 0, or set the tail end F1a of the old film to the patrone 201 side. By pushing back, the locking holes Fb and Fb of the tail end F1a are easily detached from the locking claws 2 25 and 25.
その後、更に分離係止用治具 3 5 7の先端 3 5 7 aが挿入されると、各係止爪 2 2 5 , 2 2 5のテ一パ一面に案内されて係止爪 2 2 5 , 2 2 5の上面に乗り上げる。 このとき、分離係止用治具 3 5 7の先端 3 5 7 aは、スリット孔 2 2 4内に各係止 爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5と対向するように設けられた押えリブ 2 2 6に押え付けられ、ス リット 3 5 7 cを境にして 2つに分割された端部がそれぞれ曲げ弾性により第 3 0 ( b ) 図に示すように略 V字状に屈曲し、 上記押えリブ 2 2 6による係止爪 2 2 5 , 2 2 5方向への押え力を逃がすように作用する。従って、 分離係止用治具 3 5 7の先端 3 5 7 aは、略 V字状に屈曲した外側が浮くような状態となり、その結果、 旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aは、 各係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5の外側から係止爪 2 2 5 , 2 2 5の上方へ持ち上げられる。 これにより各係止爪 2 2 5 , 2 2 5から旧フィルム の尾端 F 1 aの係止孔 F b、 F bを浮かし、 両者の係合状態を解除する。  Thereafter, when the tip 357 a of the separation locking jig 3557 is further inserted, it is guided over the taper of each of the locking claws 2 25, 2 25 and guided by the locking claws 2 25. Ride on top of, 2 2 5 At this time, the tip 357 a of the jig for separation and locking 35 7 is provided with a holding rib 2 2 provided in the slit hole 2 24 so as to face each of the locking claws 2 25 and 2 25. 6 and the two ends divided by the slit 357c are bent in a substantially V-shape as shown in Fig. 30 (b) due to bending elasticity. It acts so as to release the holding force in the direction of the locking claws 2 25, 2 25 by the ribs 2 26. Therefore, the leading end 357 a of the separation locking jig 357 becomes a state in which the outer side bent in a substantially V shape floats, and as a result, the tail end F 1 a of the old film is The pawls 2 25 and 2 25 are lifted from the outside of the pawls 2 25 and 2 25 to above. As a result, the locking holes Fb and Fb of the tail end F1a of the old film are floated from the locking claws 2 25 and 2 25, and the engagement between them is released.
上記の如く尾端 F l aと係止爪 2 2 5 , 2 2 5との係合状態が解除されると、次 いで、スライド部材 3 5 5のみをスライドさせて尾端引張部材 3 5 2をパト口一ネ 2 0 1から引き離す方向に移動させる (第 3 2図) 。 これによりパト口一ネ 2 0 1 から旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aが取り外される。次いで、取り外された旧フィルムの 尾端 F 1 aに対して尾端吸着排出用吸盤 3 5 9が下降してこれを吸着した後再度 上昇し、 尾端引張部材 3 5 2から除去する。 このとき、 分離係止用治具 3 5 7は、 その先端 3 5 7 aがパト口一ネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2を通りスプール 2 0 2 のスリット孔 2 4内に挿入され、各係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5と押えリブ 2 2 6との間 に挟まれた状態のままである。  As described above, when the engagement between the tail end Fla and the locking claws 2 25, 2 25 is released, only the slide member 35 5 is slid and the tail end pulling member 35 2 is pulled out. It is moved in a direction to pull it away from the gate opening 201 (Fig. 32). As a result, the tail end F 1 a of the old film is removed from the opening 201. Next, the sucker for tail-end suction / discharge 359 descends to the tail end F1a of the removed old film, adsorbs it, and then ascends again to remove it from the tail-end tension member 352. At this time, the separation locking jig 3557 is inserted into the slit hole 24 of the spool 202, with the tip 3557a passing through the slit opening 21 of the gate opening 21. It remains sandwiched between the locking claws 2 25 and 2 25 and the holding rib 2 26.
旧フィルムがパトローネ 2 0 1から取り外されると、次のフィルム係止工程 5 5 0では、新フィルムをパトローネ 2 0 1に係止する。 このフィルム係止工程 5 5 0 における係止手段には、上記フィルム分離工程において用いた分離手段をそのまま 使用すると、フィルムの分離と係止とを一連の工程として連続して行うことができ るために好ましい。 When the old film is removed from the patrone 201, the next film locking process 5 5 At 0, the new film is locked in the patrone 201. If the separating means used in the film separating step is used as it is as the locking means in the film locking step 550, the film separation and locking can be performed continuously as a series of steps. Preferred.
旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aがパト口一ネ 2 0 1から取り外されると、フィルムシュ —ト 3 5 3からは送りローラ 3 5 8によって新フィルム F 2がパト口一ネ 2 0 1 のスリット口 2 1 2に向けて移送される (第 3 3図) 。 この新フィルム F 2は、 ス プール 2 0 2の各係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5と係合する係止孔を有する、スプール 2 0 2の係止構造と対応する尾端構造を有している。  When the tail end F 1 a of the old film is removed from the opening 21, the new film F 2 is slit from the opening 35 5 by the feed roller 35 8. It is transferred to mouth 2 12 (Fig. 33). This new film F2 has a tail end structure corresponding to the locking structure of the spool 202, which has a locking hole that engages with each of the locking claws 222, 225 of the spool 202. are doing.
このフィルムシュート 3 5 3から供給される新フィルムの尾端 F 2 aは、分離係 止用治具 3 5 7の下面側からパト口一ネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2に向けて供給 されるため、先端 3 5 7 aがスプール 2 0 2のスリツト孔 2 2 4内に挿入されたま まの状態の分離係止用治具 3 5 7の下面に案内されながら、パトローネ 2 0 1のス リット口 2 1 2を通りスプール 2 0 2のスリット孔 2 2 4まで挿入される(第 3 4 ( a ) 図) 。  The tail end F2a of the new film supplied from the film chute 353 is supplied from the lower surface side of the separation locking jig 357 toward the slit 221 of the pat opening 201. Of the patrone 201 while being guided by the lower surface of the separation and locking jig 357 with the leading end 357a inserted into the slit hole 224 of the spool 202. It is inserted up to the slit hole 222 of the spool 202 through the slit opening 212 (Fig. 34 (a)).
即ち、新フィルム F 2をスプール 2 0 2に係止するための治具は、 旧フィルムの 尾端 F 1 aをスプール 2 0 2から取り外すための治具と同一の治具を使用し、しか も、その先端 3 5 7 aが旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aの分離時にスプール 2 0 2のスリ ット孔 2 2 4内に挿入されたままの状態の分離係止用治具 3 5 7をガイドとして、 新フィルム F 2をパト口一ネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2からスプール 2 0 2のス リット孔 2 2 4内に挿入するようにしている。  In other words, the jig for locking the new film F2 to the spool 202 should be the same as the jig for removing the tail end F1a of the old film from the spool 202. Also, the separation locking jig 35 7 7a whose tip 35 7a remains inserted into the slit hole 2 24 of the spool 202 when the tail end F 1a of the old film is separated. The new film F 2 is inserted into the slit hole 224 of the spool 202 from the slit 221 of the patrol opening 201 using the as a guide.
スプール 2 0 2のスリット孔 2 2 4まで挿入された新フィルムの尾端 F 2 aは、 分離係止用治具 3 5 7と各係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5との間に挿入され、 ここで、 略 V 字状に屈曲している分離係止用治具 3 5 7の先端 3 5 7 aによって押し下げられ、 尾端 F 2 aに形成された各係止孔 F 2 b、 F 2 bに各係止爪 2 2 5、 2 2 5が係止 される (第 3 4 ( b ) 図) 。 これによりスプール 2 0 2に新フィルム F 2が係止さ れる。 The tail end F2a of the new film, which has been inserted up to the slit hole 222 of the spool 202, is inserted between the separation locking jig 357 and each of the locking claws 225, 225. Where, approximately V It is pushed down by the tip 357 a of the separating and locking jig 357 that is bent in the shape of a letter, and is locked in each of the locking holes F2b and F2b formed in the tail end F2a. The claws 222 and 225 are locked (FIG. 34 (b)). This locks the new film F 2 on the spool 202.
新フィルム F 2の係止が完了すると、スライド部材 3 5 6はパトローネ 2 0 1力、 ら離れる方向にスライド移動し、分離係止用治具 3 5 7をパトローネ 2 0 1のスリ ットロ 2 1 2から抜き出す。  When the locking of the new film F 2 is completed, the slide member 356 slides in the direction away from the patrone 201, and the separating and locking jig 357 is moved into the patrone 201 slit slot 21. Extract from 2.
このようにしてパト口一ネ 2 0 1から旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aが取り外され、新 フィルム F 2が係止されると、次のフィルム巻取り工程 6 5 0では係止された新フ イルム F 2をスプール 2 0 2に巻き取っていく。 ここでは、パトローネ 2 0 1を上 記パトローネホルダ一 3 5 1に保持した状態でそのまま行うことができる。  In this way, when the tail end F1a of the old film is removed from the patrol opening 201 and the new film F2 is locked, in the next film winding step 650, the locked new film The film F2 is wound on a spool 202. Here, the operation can be performed as it is with the patrone 201 held in the patrone holder 1351.
以上のように、本発明に係る写真用パト口一ネの再使用方法によれば、パトロー ネを全く分解することなく旧フィルムの尾端を取り外すことができると共に、新フ イルムを係止し、 巻き取ることができる。従って、 パト口一ネの再使用に際してゴ ミを大幅に削減することができる。  As described above, according to the method for reusing a photographic patton according to the present invention, the tail end of the old film can be removed without disassembling the patrone at all, and the new film can be locked. , Can be wound up. Therefore, it is possible to greatly reduce the amount of waste when reusing the pato mouth.
しかも、旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aの分離の際に使用した治具をガイドとして新フ イルム F 2の係止を行うようにすれば、旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aの分離と新フィル ム F 2の係止とを同一の分離係止用治具 3 5 7を用い、なお且つ、その分離係止用 治具 3 5 7をパト口一ネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2から一度揷入するだけで、旧フ イルム尾端 F l aの分離と新フィルム F 2の係止をそのまま行うことができ、新フ イルム F 2の係止時に別途新たな専用の治具に交換したり、フィルム係止作業をフ ィルム分離作業と独立した別作業とする必要がなく、作業工程の簡略化を図ること ができる。 次に、本発明に係る写真用パト口一ネの再使用システムについて第 2 2図を参照 しつつ説明する。 この再使用システムは、以上説明した写真用パトローネの再使用 方法におけるパト口一ネの種類判別工程 1 5 0からフィルム巻取工程 6 5 0へと 至る一連の工程をシステム化したものであり、写真用パトローネの再使用方法の説 明と重複する部分についての説明は省略する。 Moreover, if the jig used for separating the tail end F 1 a of the old film is used as a guide to lock the new film F 2, the separation of the tail end F 1 a of the old film and the new film can be performed. Using the same separating and locking jig 3557 for locking the system F2, the jig for separating and locking 357 is inserted through the slit 2 1 2 With only one insertion, the old film tail edge Fla can be separated and the new film F2 can be locked as it is.When the new film F2 is locked, a new dedicated jig must be replaced. Also, it is not necessary to perform the film locking operation separately from the film separation operation, and the operation process can be simplified. Next, a reuse system for a photographic pout mouth according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. This reuse system is a systematization of a series of steps from the step 150 for discriminating the type of patrol mouth to the film winding step 650 in the method for reusing a photographic cartridge described above. A description of a portion overlapping with the description of the method for reusing the photo patrone will be omitted.
この再使用システムにおいては、種類判別工程 1 5 0でパトローネの種類を判別 すると、そのパト口一ネの種類に応じたスプールとフィルムとの係止構造の判別を 自動的に行う。 この係止構造の判別は、種類判別手段に予めパト口一ネ種とスプー ル構造との関係を記憶させたデータテ一ブルを用意しておくことで実現可能であ る。  In this reuse system, when the type of the cartridge is determined in the type determining step 150, the locking structure between the spool and the film according to the type of the cartridge is automatically determined. The determination of the locking structure can be realized by preparing a data table in which the type discriminating means stores in advance the relationship between the type of pawl and the spool structure.
このデータテーブルの一例を第 3 5図に示す。デ一夕テ一ブルには、パトローネ コード欄 1 5 1とパトローネ種欄 1 5 2とスプール構造欄 1 5 3と使用治具欄 1 5 4とを有している。  An example of this data table is shown in FIG. The table has a patrone code column 151, a patrone type column 152, a spool structure column 153, and a used jig column 154.
パト口一ネコード欄 1 5 1には、例えばパトローネ表面の D Xバ一コードに記録 されているコード情報が予め格納されている。  For example, the code information recorded in the DX bar code on the surface of the patrone is stored in the patrol port code field 151 in advance.
パトローネ種欄 1 5 2には、上記コード情報毎のパトローネの種類、例えばメ一 力一の種類、 品種等が格納される。 ここでは A、 B、 C , Dの 4種のパト口一ネ種 が格納されている。  The patrone type column 152 stores the type of patrone for each of the above-described code information, for example, the type, the type, and the like of each item. Here, four types of pato mouths, A, B, C, and D, are stored.
スプール構造欄 1 5 3には、上記パト口一ネ種檷 1 5 2の各パト口一ネ種毎のス プールの構造に関する情報が格納される。このスプール構造欄 1 5 3は更に係止爪 数欄 1 5 3 a、係止爪間隔欄 1 5 3 b、押えリブ数欄 1 5 3 c及び押えリブ間隔欄 1 5 3 dに区分けされ、各欄にそれぞれ各パト口一ネ種毎の係止爪数、押えリブ数 及びそれらの間隔の情報が格納されている。 使用治具欄 1 5 4は、スプール構造欄 1 5 3に規定されるスプール構造を有する 各パトローネ種に最も適した治具の種類が格納されている。ここではパトローネ種 A、 B、 C、 Dに対応して a、 b、 cの 3種の治具が規定されている。 なお、 ここ における治具は、 フィルムの分離時と係止時とに共通する分離係 用治具である。 本発明に係る再使用システムでは、種類判別工程 1 5 0においてパトローネの種 類が判別されると、 このデータテ一ブルに基づいて、そのパトローネに最適な治具 が自動的に判別される。 The spool structure column 153 stores information on the structure of the spool for each of the above-mentioned pat-mouth types 口 152. This spool structure column 15 3 is further divided into locking claw number column 15 3 a, locking claw spacing column 15 3 b, holding rib number column 15 3 c, and holding rib spacing column 15 3 d. In each column, information on the number of locking claws, the number of pressing ribs, and the interval between them for each kind of patrol mouth is stored. The used jig column 154 stores the type of jig most suitable for each patrone type having the spool structure specified in the spool structure column 153. Here, three types of jigs, a, b, and c, are specified for patrone types A, B, C, and D. Note that the jig here is a separation-related jig that is common when the film is separated and when the film is locked. In the reuse system according to the present invention, when the type of the patrone is determined in the type determining step 150, a jig optimal for the patrone is automatically determined based on the data table.
この種類判別工程 1 5 0における処理フローの一例を第 3 6図を用いて説明す ると、 まず、パトローネの表面に記録されている D Xバーコードをバーコ一ドリ一 ダ一により読み取る (S 1 ) 。 次いで、 読み取られた情報を第 3 5図に示すデータ テーブルと照会する (S 2 ) 。 これにより、 読み取られたコードが 「1 2 3 4」 で ある場合、 このパトローネ種は「A」 であることが分かり、 そのスプール構造はス 'プール構造欄 1 5 3に規定されている通りのものであることが分かる。これにより、 使用治具は、使用治具欄 1 5 4から「a」の治具であることが判断される(S 3 )。 ここで、読み取られた情報がデータテーブルに格納されていない場合、そのパト口 —ネは本システムに適用不可として排出する (S 4 ) 。 そして、 パト口一ネの種類 が判別されると、例えば収容トレー等にパトローネを種類毎に適宜の分別手段を用 いて分別する (S 5 ) 。 これにより後続の工程において、 その分別されたパトロー ネの種類毎に処理を行うようにすることができ、処理を効率的に進めることができ る。  An example of the processing flow in the type determination step 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. First, a DX bar code recorded on the surface of the patrone is read by a barcode reader (S1). ). Next, the read information is referred to the data table shown in FIG. 35 (S 2). As a result, if the read code is "1 2 3 4", it is known that this patrone type is "A", and the spool structure is as specified in the spool structure column 15 3. It turns out to be something. Thus, the used jig is determined to be the “a” jig from the used jig column 154 (S 3). Here, if the read information is not stored in the data table, the part is discharged as inapplicable to the present system (S4). Then, when the type of the patrol mouth is determined, the patrone is separated into, for example, a storage tray or the like using an appropriate separating means for each type (S5). As a result, in the subsequent process, the processing can be performed for each type of the separated cartridge, and the processing can be efficiently performed.
この種類判別工程 1 5 0の後、検査工程 2 5 0において尾端検查等がなされ、検 査に合格したパトローネは、治具選択工程 3 5 0において、上記データテ一ブルに 基づいてパトローネ種に応じて判別された治具を選択する。 この治具の選択は、第 2 7図に示す分離及び係止手段において、分離係止用治具 3 5 7を交換可能に設けておき、処理を行うパト口一ネの種類毎に自動的に交換さ れるようにすることで行っても良いし、上記分離及び係止手段を治具の種類毎に複 数台用意しておき、分別された種類毎に、そのパト口一ネ種に適した治具を有する 分離及び係止手段に自動的に振り分けるようにしても良い。処理されるパト口一ネ が大量である場合には、 処理効率の点で後者の方が有利である。 After this type determination step 150, a tail end inspection or the like is performed in an inspection step 250, and the patrone that has passed the inspection is subjected to a jig selection step 350 in accordance with the patrone type based on the data table. The jig determined according to is selected. The selection of the jig is performed by setting the separation and locking jig 357 in the separation and locking means shown in FIG. The separation and locking means may be prepared in multiple units for each type of jig, and for each separated type, only one type of pato mouth shall be provided. It may be arranged to automatically distribute to the separating and locking means having a suitable jig. When a large number of pats are processed, the latter is more advantageous in terms of processing efficiency.
治具が選択されると、前述したように、第 2 7図に示す分離及ぴ係止手段により、 分離係止用治具 3 5 7を用いてパト口一ネから旧フィルムの取り外し及び新フィ ルムの係止がなされ、 続いて新フィルムをスプールに巻き取る。  When the jig is selected, as described above, the separation and locking means shown in FIG. The film is locked, and the new film is wound on a spool.
本発明に係る写真用パト口一ネの再使用システムによれば、パトローネを全く分 解することなく旧フィルムの尾端を取り外すことができると共に、新フィルムを係 止し、 巻き取ることができる。従って、 パトローネの再使用に際してゴミを大幅に 削減することができる。  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to the re-use system of the patrone for a photograph which concerns on this invention, the tail end of an old film can be removed, without disassembling a patrone at all, and a new film can be locked and wound up. . Therefore, when the patrone is reused, garbage can be significantly reduced.
また、旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aの分離の際に使用した治具をガイドとして新フィ ルム F 2の係止を行うようにすれば、旧フィルムの尾端 F 1 aの分離と新フィルム F 2の係止とを同一の分離係止用治具 3 5 7を用い、なお且つ、その分離係止用治 具 3 5 7をパト口一ネ 2 0 1のスリット口 2 1 2から一度揷入するだけで、旧フィ ルム尾端 F 1 aの分離と新フィルム F 2の係止をそのまま行うことができ、新フィ ルム F 2の係止時に別途新たな専用の治具に交換したり、フィルム係止作業をフィ ルム分離作業と独立した別作業とする必要がなく、作業工程の簡略化を図ることが できる。  Also, if the jig used to separate the tail end F1a of the old film is used as a guide to lock the new film F2, the separation of the tail end F1a of the old film and the new film Using the same separating and locking jig 357 for locking the F2, the separating and locking jig 3557 is once passed through the slit 21 Just by inserting the new film F2, the old film tail end F1a can be separated and the new film F2 can be locked. Also, it is not necessary to perform the film locking operation separately from the film separating operation, and the operation process can be simplified.

Claims

請求の範囲 The scope of the claims
1 .フィルムがパトローネのスリットロから出ている使用済みパトローネを分 解せずに再使用する写真用パト口一ネの再使用方法であって、 1. A method of reusing a photo patrol port for reusing a used patrone from a slitrone of the patrone without disassembling the film,
フィルムとスプールとの係止構造の種類を判別する種類判別工程と、  A type determining step of determining the type of the locking structure between the film and the spool,
前記種類判別工程において判別された係止構造の種類に応じた治具をパトロー ネのスリット口から揷入し、スプールに係止されているフィルム尾端を取り外す分 離工程と、  A separation step of inserting a jig corresponding to the type of the locking structure determined in the type determination step from a slit opening of the cartridge and removing a tail end of the film locked on the spool;
前記種類判別工程において判別された係止構造の種類に応じた治具を用いて、該 係止構造に対応した新たなフィルム尾端をスプールに係止する係止工程と、 前記スプールに係止されたフィルムを巻き取る巻取り工程と、  A locking step of locking a new tail end of the film corresponding to the locking structure to the spool using a jig corresponding to the type of the locking structure determined in the type determination step; and locking the spool to the spool. A winding step of winding the film,
を有することを特徴とする写真用パトローネの再使用方法。 A method for reusing a photographic patrone, comprising:
2 . 前記種類判別工程において判別された係止構造の種類に応じて、 フィルム 尾端を分離及び係止するための治具を選択する選択工程を有することを特徴とす る請求の範囲第 1項に記載の写真用パトローネの再使用方法。  2. The method according to claim 1, further comprising a selecting step of selecting a jig for separating and locking the film tail end according to the type of the locking structure determined in the type determining step. The method for reusing the photographic patrone described in the paragraph.
3 . 前記種類判別工程は、 パト口一ネ表面に記録されている D Xバーコード、 ブランド名の少なくともいずれか 1種を読み取ることにより種類を判別すること を特徴とする請求の範囲第 1項に記載の写真用パト口一ネの再使用方法。  3. The type determination step according to claim 1, wherein in the type determination step, the type is determined by reading at least one of a DX barcode and a brand name recorded on the surface of the pato mouth. How to re-use the photo pat mouth described.
4.前記分離工程と係止工程とで同一の治具を使用することを特徴とする請求 の範囲第 1項に記載の写真用パトローネの再使用方法。  4. The method for reusing a photographic cartridge according to claim 1, wherein the same jig is used in the separation step and the locking step.
5 . 前記分離工程は、パトローネのスリット口から出ているフィルムをガイド として治具をスリットロから挿入して該フィルム尾端をスプールから取り外し、前 記係止工程は、前記治具をパト口一ネのスリット口から挿入した状態のまま、該治 具をガイドとして新たなフィルムをスリット口から挿入してスプールに係止する ことを特徴とする請求の範囲第 4項に記載の写真用パトローネの再使用方法。 5. In the separating step, a jig is inserted from the slit slot with the film coming out of the slit opening of the patrone as a guide, and the tail end of the film is removed from the spool. With the insertion inserted through the slit 5. The method for reusing a photographic cartridge according to claim 4, wherein a new film is inserted from a slit opening by using a tool as a guide and locked on a spool.
6 .フィルムがパトローネのスリット口から出ている使用済みパトローネを分 解せずに再使用する写真用パト口一ネの再使用システムであって、  6. A reuse system for a photographic patrol port for reusing a used patrone without disassembling a used patrone whose film comes out of a patrone slit port,
フィルムとスプールとの係止構造の種類を判別する種類判別手段と、  Type determining means for determining the type of the locking structure between the film and the spool;
前記種類判別手段において判別された係止構造の種類に応じた治具をパトロー ネのスリットロから挿入し、 スプールに係止されているフィルム尾端を取り外す 分離手段と、  A jig corresponding to the type of the locking structure determined by the type determining means is inserted from the slit slot of the cartridge, and a film tail locked on the spool is removed.
前記種類判別手段において判別された係止構造の種類に応じた治具を用いて、該 係止構造に対応した新たなフィルム尾端をスプールに係止する係止手段と、 前記スプールに係止されたフィルムを巻き取る巻取り手段と、  Locking means for locking a new film tail end corresponding to the locking structure to the spool using a jig corresponding to the type of the locking structure determined by the type determining means; locking to the spool A winding means for winding the film thus formed;
を有することを特徴とする写真用パト口一ネの再使用システム。 A reusing system for a photo pat mouth.
7 . 前記種類判別手段において判別された係止構造の種類に応じて、 フィルム 尾端を分離及び係止するための治具を選択する選択手段を有することを特徴とす る請求の範囲第 6項に記載の写真用パト口一ネの再使用システム。  7. A method according to claim 6, further comprising selecting means for selecting a jig for separating and locking the tail end of the film according to the type of the locking structure determined by the type determining means. The reusable system for photo pat mouths described in the section.
8 . 前記種類判別手段は、 パトローネ表面に記録されている D Xバーコード、 ブランド名の少なくともいずれか 1種を読み取ることにより種類を判別すること を特徴とする請求の範囲第 6項に記載の写真用パト口一ネの再使用システム。  8. The photograph according to claim 6, wherein the type determination means determines the type by reading at least one of a DX barcode and a brand name recorded on the patrone surface. A reusable system for pat mouths.
9 .前記分離手段と係止手段とで同一の治具を使用することを特徴とする請求 の範囲第 6項に記載の写真用パトローネの再使用システム。  9. The photographic cartridge reuse system according to claim 6, wherein the same jig is used for the separating means and the locking means.
1 0 .前記分離手段は、パトローネのスリット口から出ているフィルムをガイ ドとして治具をスリットロから挿入して該フィルム尾端をスプールから取り外し、 前記係止手段は、前記治具をパトローネのスリット口から挿入した状態のまま、該 治具をガイドとして新たなフィルムをスリットロから挿入してスプールに係止す ることを特徴とする請求の範囲第 9項に記載の写真用パ卜ローネの再使用システ ム。 10.The separating means inserts a jig from the slit slot with the film coming out of the slit opening of the patrone as a guide, removes the film tail end from the spool, and the locking means attaches the jig to the patrone. While inserting from the slit opening, 10. The photographic cartridge reuse system according to claim 9, wherein a new film is inserted from a slit slot and locked to a spool by using a jig as a guide.
1 1 .写真フィルムを揷通するスリット口を有し、スプールを内蔵すると共に 両側がキヤップで遮蔽されてなる使用済みの写真用パト口一ネを分解せずに検査 する写真用パトローネの検査方法であって、  1 1. A photo cartridge inspection method that has a slit opening through which photographic film passes, has a built-in spool, and has both sides shielded by caps. And
上記写真用パトロ一ネの内部を検査する内部検査工程を有することを特徴とす る使用済み写真用パトローネの検査方法。  A method for inspecting a used photographic cartridge, comprising an internal inspection step for inspecting the inside of the photographic cartridge.
1 2 . 内部検查工程は、写真用パト口一ネの漏光の有無を検查する漏光検查ェ 程及び/又は写真用パトローネ内の異物の有無を検査する異物検查工程を含むこ とを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1 1項に記載の使用済み写真用パトローネの検査方 法。  1 2. The internal inspection process shall include a light leakage inspection process for detecting the presence or absence of light leakage in the photographic port and / or a foreign material inspection process for inspecting for the presence of foreign material in the photographic cartridge. The method for inspecting used photographic cartridges according to claim 11, characterized by the following:
1 3 . 漏光検査工程は、写真用パトローネの外部におけるスプールの軸方向か ら光を照射し、その際に該写真用パト口一ネのスリッ卜口から漏れ出る光量を検出 し、その検出結果から漏光の有無を判定することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1 2項 に記載の使用済み写真用パト口一ネの検査方法。  1 3. The light leakage inspection process involves irradiating light from the axial direction of the spool outside the photographic cartridge, detecting the amount of light leaking from the slit of the photographic cartridge, and detecting the light. 13. The method for inspecting a used photographic port as claimed in claim 12, wherein the presence or absence of light leakage is determined from the data.
1 4. 異物検查工程は、写真用パトローネへ所定の振動を与え、 その際に生じ るノィズを写真用パトローネから検出し、その検出結果から異物の有無を判定する ことを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1 2項に記載の使用済み写真用パトローネの検査 方法。  1 4. In the foreign matter detection step, a predetermined vibration is applied to the photographic patrone, noise generated at that time is detected from the photographic patrone, and the presence or absence of foreign matter is determined from the detection result. The method for inspecting used photographic cartridges described in Paragraph 12 of the Scope.
1 5 . さらに、上記写真用パトローネの外観を検査する外観検査工程を有する ことを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1 1項に記載の使用済み写真用パト口一ネの検査 方法。 15. The method for inspecting a used photographic doorway according to claim 11, further comprising an appearance inspection step for inspecting the appearance of the photographic cartridge.
1 6 .外観検査工程は、スプールに写真フィルムの尾端の一部が係止されてい るか否かを検査する尾端フィルム有無検査工程を含むことを特徴とする請求の範 囲第 1 5項記載の使用済み写真用パトローネの検査方法。 16. The visual inspection step includes a tail end film presence / absence inspection step for inspecting whether or not a part of the tail end of the photographic film is locked on the spool. Inspection method of used photo patrone described in section.
1 7 .尾端フィルム有無検査工程若しくはその上流工程に、スプールを回転し て、上記写真フィルムの尾端の一部をスリット口から外に出すフィルム巻出工程を 有することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1 6項に記載の使用済み写真用パトローネ , の検査方法。  17. A film unwinding step for rotating the spool to take out a part of the tail end of the photographic film out of the slit opening in the tail end film presence inspection step or an upstream step thereof. Inspection method for used photo patrone, described in item 16 of the scope.
1 8 . フィルム巻出工程は、スプール回転時のトルクを検出してスプールの回 し過ぎを防止することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1 7項に記載の使用済み写真用 パト口一ネの検査方法。  18. The film unwinding step detects a torque at the time of rotation of the spool to prevent the spool from being turned too much. Inspection methods.
1 9 . フィルム巻出工程は、スプール回転時のスプールの位相を検出してスプ ールの回し過ぎを防止することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1 7項に記載の使用済 み写真用パトローネの検査方法。  19. The used photographic cartridge according to claim 17, wherein the film unwinding step detects a phase of the spool when the spool is rotated to prevent excessive rotation of the spool. Inspection method.
2 0 .検査に先立ち、複数の写真用パト口一ネをスプールの軸方向に整列させ ると共に各スリットロの位置決めを行う整列位置決め工程を有することを特徴と する請求の範囲第 1 1項に記載の使用済み写真用パトローネの検査方法。  20. The method according to claim 11, further comprising, prior to the inspection, an alignment positioning step of aligning a plurality of photographic gates in the axial direction of the spool and positioning each slit slot. Inspection method for used photo patrone.
2 1 .検査に先立ち、写真用パトローネを再使用の適合品と非適合品とに分別 する分別工程を有することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1 1項に記載の使用済み写 真用パトローネの検査方法。  21.Prior to the inspection, there is a separation process for separating the photographic patrone into a conforming product and a non-conforming product for reuse. Inspection methods.
2 2 .検査の終了した写真用パトローネを種類別に回収する回収工程を有する ことを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1 1項に記載の使用済み写真用パトローネの検査 方法。  22. The method for inspecting used photographic patrones according to claim 11, further comprising a collecting step of collecting, by type, photographic patrones for which inspection has been completed.
2 3 . 各工程内での写真用パト口一ネの搬送中は、 スプールの位相を所定の向 きに固定することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1 1項に記載の使用済み写真用パト ローネの検査方法。 2 3. During the transportation of the photo door in each process, the phase of the spool is 12. The method for inspecting used photographic cartridges according to claim 11, wherein the cartridges are fixed at the same time.
2 4. 写真フィルムを揷通するスリット口を有し、スプールを内蔵すると共に 両側がキャップで遮蔽されてなる使用済みの写真用パトローネを分解せずに検査 する写真用パトローネの検査システムであって、  2 4. A photographic patrone inspection system that has a slit opening through which photographic film passes, has a built-in spool, and is capable of inspecting a used photographic patrone without disassembly, both sides of which are shielded by caps. ,
上記写真用パトローネの内部を検査する内部検査手段を有することを特徴とす る使用済み写真用パトローネの検査システム。  An inspection system for a used photographic patrone, comprising an internal inspection means for inspecting the inside of the photographic patrone.
2 5 . 内部検査手段は、写真用パトローネ内への漏光の有無を検査する漏光検 査手段及び Z又は写真用パトローネ内の異物の有無を検査する異物検査手段を含 むことを特徵とする請求の範囲第 2 4項に記載の使用済み写真用パトローネの検 查システム。  25. The claim is characterized in that the internal inspection means includes a light leakage inspection means for inspecting the presence or absence of light leakage into the photographic cartridge and a foreign matter inspection means for inspecting the presence of foreign matter in the Z or photographic cartridge. A system for detecting used patrones for used photographs according to Item 24.
2 6 .漏光検查手段は、写真用パト口一ネの外部におけるスプールの軸方向か ら光を照射する光照射手段と、その際に該写真用パトローネのスリット口から漏れ 出る光量を検出する光量検出手段と、該光量検出手段の検出結果から漏光の有無を 判定する漏光判定手段とを有することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 2 5項に記載の 使用済み写真用パトローネの検査システム。  26. The light leakage detecting means detects the light irradiating means for irradiating the light from the axial direction of the spool outside the photo patrol port, and detects the amount of light leaking from the slit opening of the photo patrol at that time. 26. The inspection system for used photographic cartridges according to claim 25, further comprising: a light amount detecting unit; and a light leakage determining unit that determines presence or absence of light leakage based on a detection result of the light amount detecting unit.
2 7 . 異物検査手段は、 写真用パトローネに所定の振動を与える加振手段と、 その際に生じるノイズを写真用パトローネから検出するノイズ検出手段と、該ノィ ズ検出手段の検出結果から異物の有無を判定する異物有無判定手段とを有するこ とを特徴とする請求の範囲第 2 5項に記載の使用済み写真用パトローネの検査シ スァ 。  27. The foreign matter inspection means includes: a vibration means for applying a predetermined vibration to the photographic patrone; a noise detecting means for detecting noise generated at that time from the photographic patrone; and a foreign matter detecting means based on the detection result of the noise detecting means. 26. The inspection system for used photographic cartridges according to claim 25, further comprising means for determining presence or absence of foreign matter.
2 8 . さらに、上記写真用パト口一ネの外観を検査する外観検査手段を有する ことを特徴とする請求の範囲第 2 5項に記載の使用済み写真用パトローネの検査 システム。 28. The inspection of the used photographic cartridge according to claim 25, further comprising an appearance inspection means for inspecting an appearance of the photographic cartridge. system.
2 9 .外観検査手段は、スプールに写真フィルムの尾端の一部が係止されてい るか否かを検査する尾端フィルム有無検査手段を含むことを特徴とする請求の範 囲第 2 8項に記載の使用済み写真用パトローネの検査システム。  29. The outer appearance inspection means includes a tail end film presence / absence inspection means for inspecting whether or not a part of the tail end of the photographic film is locked on the spool. Inspection system for used photographic patrone as described in the item.
3 0 .尾端フィルム有無検査手段による尾端フィルムの検査の際若しくはその 上流工程に、スプールを回転して上記写真フィルムの尾端の一部をスリットロから 外に出すフィルム卷出手段を有することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 2 9項に記載 の使用済み写真用パトロ一ネの検査システム。  30. At the time of the inspection of the tail end film by the inspection means for the presence of the tail end film or in the upstream process, a film unwinding means for rotating the spool to take out a part of the tail end of the photographic film out of the slit roll is provided. The inspection system for used photographic patrones according to claim 29, characterized in that:
3 1 . フィルム卷出手段は、スプールをフィルム巻出し方向に回転させるスプ —ル回転手段と、スプール回転時のトルクを検出してスプールの回し過ぎを防止す るトルク検出手段とを有することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 3 0項に記載の使用 済み写真用パト口一ネの検査システム。  31. The film unwinding means includes spool rotating means for rotating the spool in the film unwinding direction, and torque detecting means for detecting torque during rotation of the spool to prevent excessive rotation of the spool. 31. The inspection system for a used photograph pato-mouth according to claim 30, characterized in that:
3 2 . フィルム巻出手段は、スプールをフィルム巻出し方向に回転させるスプ —ル回転手段と、スプール両端の軸内側に設けられたリブの向きによりスプールの 位相を検出してスプールの回し過ぎを防止する位相検出手段とを有することを特 徵とする請求の範囲第 3 0項に記載の使用済み写真用パトローネの検査システム。  32. The film unwinding means detects the phase of the spool based on the spool rotating means for rotating the spool in the film unwinding direction and the orientation of the ribs provided inside the shaft at both ends of the spool, and detects excessive rotation of the spool. 30. The inspection system for used photographic patrones according to claim 30, further comprising a phase detecting means for preventing the photographic patrone from being used.
3 3 .検査に先立ち、複数の写真用パトローネをスプールの軸方向に整列させ ると共に各スリットロの位置決めを行う整列位置決め手段を有することを特徴と する請求の範囲第 2 4項に記載の使用済み写真用パト口一ネの検査システム。  33.Used according to claim 24, wherein prior to the inspection, a plurality of photographic patrones are aligned in the axial direction of the spool and alignment positioning means for positioning each slit slot is provided. Inspection system for photos
3 4.検査に先立ち、写真用パト口一ネを再使用の適合品と非適合品とに分別 する分別手段を有することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 2 4項に記載の使用済み写 真用パトローネの検査システム。  3 4. Prior to the inspection, the used photograph according to claim 24, characterized by having a means for separating the photographic port into a reusable conforming product and a non-conforming product. Patrone inspection system.
3 5 .検査の終了した写真用パトローネを種類別に回収する回収手段を有する ことを特徴とする請求の範囲第 2 4項に記載の使用済み写真用パト口一ネの検査 システム。 3 5. Has collection means to collect photographic patrones that have been inspected by type 25. The inspection system for a used photo pat mouth as set forth in claim 24, wherein:
3 6 . 各工程に、工程内の写真用パト口一ネの搬送中にスプールの位相を所定 の向きに固定する位相固定手段を有することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 2 4項に 記載の使用済み写真用パトローネの検査システム。  36. The method according to claim 24, wherein each step includes a phase fixing means for fixing the phase of the spool in a predetermined direction during the transfer of the photographic port in the step. Inspection system for used photo patrone.
3 7 .写真フィルムを装填するスリット口を有し、スプールを内蔵すると共に 両側がキャップで遮蔽されてなる写真用パトローネに写真フィルムを装填して写 真用フィルムを製造する方法であって、  37. A method for manufacturing a photographic film by loading a photographic film into a photographic patrone having a slit opening for loading a photographic film, a built-in spool and both sides shielded by caps,
前記スリットロに、平板状の先端ガイド部に平板状の後端ガイド部を所定の角度 で傾斜状に接続してなるガイド部材を、前記先端ガイド部がパトローネ本体に対す るスリットロの延出方向と平行な状態で、且つ前記後端ガイド部がスリットロに対 してパトローネ本体側に位置した状態で、前記先端ガイド部側から直進状に挿入す る工程と、  A guide member, which is formed by connecting a flat rear guide portion to a flat front guide portion at a predetermined angle and inclined at a predetermined angle, is provided on the slit ro, in accordance with the extension direction of the slit ro with respect to the patrone main body. Inserting the rear end guide portion in a straight line from the front end guide portion side in a parallel state and in a state where the rear end guide portion is positioned on the cartridge body side with respect to the slit slot;
前記スリットロに挿入された前記ガイド部材を傾斜側に向けて回転させてその 先端ガイド部の先端を前記スプールへ向けると共に、前記ガイド部材の後端ガイド 部の一部が前記スリット口に挿入されるまで更に挿入して、前記先端ガイド部の先 端をスプールに接近させる工程と、  The guide member inserted into the slit slot is rotated toward the inclined side to turn the tip of the tip guide portion toward the spool, and a part of the rear end guide portion of the guide member is inserted into the slit opening. Inserting the distal end of the distal end guide portion closer to the spool,
前記ガイド部材の傾斜面側に接触させつつ写真フィルムを前記スリット口から 挿入し、 該フィルムの先端を前記スプールに係止させる工程と、  Inserting a photographic film from the slit opening while contacting the inclined surface side of the guide member, and locking the leading end of the film to the spool;
前記スリットロに挿入されず外部に存在している前記後端ガイド部を引き出す と共に傾斜側に向けて回転させた後、先端ガイド部を直進状に引き出して該ガイド 部材を前記写真用パトローネ外へ取り出す工程と、  After pulling out the rear end guide portion which is not inserted in the slit slot and is present outside and rotates it toward the inclined side, the front end guide portion is pulled out in a straight line and the guide member is taken out of the photo cartridge. Process and
前記スプールに係止した写真フィルムを巻き取る工程と、 を有することを特徴とする写真用フィルムの製造方法。 Winding the photographic film locked on the spool, A method for producing a photographic film, comprising:
3 8 . 前記ガイド部材は、 内部にフィルム通路を形成してなる中空状のガイド 部材を成し、  38. The guide member is a hollow guide member having a film passage formed therein,
前記スプールに係止させる工程は、写真フィルムを前記ガイド部材のフィルム通 路に後端ガイド部側から挿入し、該写真フィルムの先端を前記スプールに係止させ る、  The step of engaging the spool with the spool includes inserting the photographic film into the film passage of the guide member from the rear end guide portion side, and engaging the leading end of the photographic film with the spool.
ことを特徴とする請求の範囲第 3 7項に記載の写真用フィルムの製造方法。 38. The method for producing a photographic film according to claim 37, wherein:
3 9 . さらに、平板状の先端ガイド部に平板状の後端ガイド部を所定の角度で 傾斜状に接続してなるガイド部材を 2枚用意し、該 2枚のガイド部材を所定の間隙 を介して併設して該間隙にフィルム通路を形成する工程を有し、  39. Further, two guide members are prepared by connecting a flat rear end guide portion at a predetermined angle to the flat front guide portion, and the two guide members are separated by a predetermined gap. Having a step of forming a film path in the gap by juxtaposition through the gap,
前記直進状に挿入する工程は、 前記スリット口に、 前記 2枚のガイド部材を、 前 記先端ガイド部がパトローネ本体に対するスリットロの延出方向と平行な状態で、 且つ前記後端ガイド部がスリットロに対してパトローネ本体側に位置した状態で、 前記先端ガイド部側から直進状に挿入し、  The step of linearly inserting the two guide members into the slit opening includes a state in which the front end guide section is parallel to the direction in which the slit slot extends with respect to the patrone main body, and the rear end guide section has the slit slot. In a state positioned on the patrone main body side, and inserted straight from the tip guide section side,
前記スプールに係止させる工程は、前記ガイド部材の間隙で形成されるフィルム 通路に後端ガイド部側から写真フィルムを揷入し、該写真フィルムの先端を前記ス プールに係止させ、  The step of locking the spool with the spool includes inserting a photographic film into the film passage formed by the gap between the guide members from the rear end guide portion side, locking the leading end of the photographic film with the spool,
さらに、写真用パトローネ外へ取り出した前記 2枚のガイド部材を分離させて前 記フィルム通路を開放させる工程とを有する、  A step of separating the two guide members taken out of the photographic cartridge to open the film passage.
ことを特徴とする請求の範囲第 3 7項に記載の写真用フィルムの製造方法。 38. The method for producing a photographic film according to claim 37, wherein:
4 0 . 上記写真用パトローネは 1 3 5フィルムパトローネであり、上記ガイド 部材の内側のなす角度が 1 1 0 ° ± 2 0 ° であることを特徴とする請求の範囲第 3 7項に記載の写真用フィルムの製造方法。 40. The photographic cartridge according to claim 37, wherein the photographic cartridge is a 135 film cartridge, and an angle formed by the inside of the guide member is 110 ° ± 20 °. Manufacturing method of photographic film.
41. 上記写真用パト口一ネは 135フィルムパトローネであり、上記ガイド 部材の内側のなす角度が 110° ±20° であることを特徴とする請求の範囲第 38項に記載の写真用フィルムの製造方法。 41. The photographic film opening according to claim 38, wherein the photographic opening is a 135 film patrone, and the angle formed by the inside of the guide member is 110 ° ± 20 °. Production method.
42. 上記写真用パトロ一ネは 135フィルムパ卜口一ネであり、上記ガイド 部材の内側のなす角度が 110° ±20° であることを特徴とする請求の範囲第 39項に記載の写真用フィルムの製造方法。  42. The photographic cartridge according to claim 39, wherein the photographic cartridge is a 135 film cartridge slot, and the angle formed by the inside of the guide member is 110 ° ± 20 °. Film production method.
PCT/JP2003/007144 2002-06-13 2003-06-05 Method of inspecting used photographic cassette, method of reusing the cassette, and method of producing photographic film WO2003107091A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2002173301A JP2004020750A (en) 2002-06-13 2002-06-13 Photographic film production method
JP2002-173301 2002-06-13
JP2002191532A JP2004037589A (en) 2002-06-28 2002-06-28 Inspection method for used photographic cartridge and inspection system therefor
JP2002-191532 2002-06-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2003107091A1 true WO2003107091A1 (en) 2003-12-24

Family

ID=29738393

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2003/007144 WO2003107091A1 (en) 2002-06-13 2003-06-05 Method of inspecting used photographic cassette, method of reusing the cassette, and method of producing photographic film

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN1659475A (en)
WO (1) WO2003107091A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0315797A (en) * 1989-06-14 1991-01-24 Hitachi Ltd Foreign matter checking device
EP0789263A2 (en) * 1992-07-15 1997-08-13 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Cassette with a photographic film
JPH11108852A (en) * 1997-10-06 1999-04-23 Maki Seisakusho:Kk Agricultural product pressing apparatus used in internal quality instrumentation apparatus
JP2001337424A (en) * 2000-05-29 2001-12-07 Panakku Kogyo Kk Reusable spool and method for recovering and reusing the same

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0315797A (en) * 1989-06-14 1991-01-24 Hitachi Ltd Foreign matter checking device
EP0789263A2 (en) * 1992-07-15 1997-08-13 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Cassette with a photographic film
JPH11108852A (en) * 1997-10-06 1999-04-23 Maki Seisakusho:Kk Agricultural product pressing apparatus used in internal quality instrumentation apparatus
JP2001337424A (en) * 2000-05-29 2001-12-07 Panakku Kogyo Kk Reusable spool and method for recovering and reusing the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN1659475A (en) 2005-08-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP0664483B1 (en) Film processing method and system
JPH04362937A (en) Photographic film cartridge and method for handling photographic film
US6438323B1 (en) Camera film loading with delayed culling of defective cameras
US4888613A (en) Method of and apparatus for processing exposed photographic films
JPH07319074A (en) Development printing method of photographic film and device there for
CN1184533C (en) Method for producing and recovery film assembly control film holder or mounted lens
WO2003107091A1 (en) Method of inspecting used photographic cassette, method of reusing the cassette, and method of producing photographic film
JP3483153B2 (en) Method for producing photosensitive film magazine and method for producing photosensitive film magazine package
US6381409B1 (en) Method of disassembling lens-fitted photo film unit and disassembling apparatus therefor
WO1997027514A1 (en) Photograph processing system
JP2004037589A (en) Inspection method for used photographic cartridge and inspection system therefor
JP2991345B2 (en) Photo collation method and device
JP2001337424A (en) Reusable spool and method for recovering and reusing the same
JP3818306B2 (en) Manufacturing method of photosensitive film magazine
JP3690508B2 (en) Photosensitive film magazine production equipment
JP3583210B2 (en) How to handle cartridges
JP3809652B2 (en) Manufacturing method of photosensitive film magazine
JP2003280147A (en) Method and system for recycling photographic cartridge
JPH08152704A (en) Method for collating photographic materials in photograph processing system
US5803386A (en) Film cartridge case
JPH07325366A (en) Photographic carrying device, winding-in device and method and device for assembling photographic film cartridge
US20060115263A1 (en) Device and method for unloading film
JP2006208777A (en) Image forming method and apparatus
JPH09120152A (en) Film splicing device
JPH06138631A (en) Device for taking out dp bag

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): BR CN ID IN KR MX PH PL RU SG US VN

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PT RO SE SI SK TR

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 20038132885

Country of ref document: CN

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase